Imagine Communications Platinum IP3, Platinum PX-FR-28, PX-FR-15, Platinum PX-RES, Platinum PX-ALARM, Platinum PX-HSRAEC-OM, Platinum PX-576x1024-3G, PX-288x512-3G, Platinum PX-ATDM64-X28, Platinum PX-IB Installation and Operation Manual
विज्ञापन
विज्ञापन
Edition H
Installation and Operation Manual
Platinum™ IP3
28 RU and 15 RU Frame and Modules
June 2016
Platinum™ IP3 28 RU and 15 RU Frame and Modules Installation and Operation Manual
Publication Information
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp.
Proprietary and Confidential.
Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential.
Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications. All others uses are illegal.
This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to which it refers. Imagine Communications reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in equipment, design, specifications, components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of the product.
Trademarks
Platinum™, Platinum™ IP3, Magellan™, Magellan CCS Navigator™ are trademarks or trade names of
Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies.
Contact Information
Imagine Communications has office locations around the world. For domestic and international location and contact information, visit our Contact page (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/howbuy/contact-us).
Support Contact Information
For domestic and international support contact information see:
Support Contacts (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/how-buy/contact-us)
Worldwide Support e-mail (mailto: [email protected])
Customer Community Portal (http://app.imaginecommunications.com/customercommunity)
Warranty & Contract Information (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/customercare)
MyImagine Academy Training (http://www.imaginecommunications-academy.com)
Product Manuals (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/product-manuals)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 2
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
Contents
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 3
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 4
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G) ............................. 68
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28) .............................................. 78
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 5
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 6
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 7
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-
FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG) ..................................... 126
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module ...................................... 147
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 8
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules ...................................... 175
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 9
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM .......................................... 195
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability ......................................... 213
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 10
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame ............................. 243
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 11
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules ....................................................... 263
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 12
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15) ....................................................... 280
Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-ADPTR) .......................................................... 292
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 13
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
This manual details the features, installation, operation, maintenance, and specifications for the
Platinum IP3.
Audience
This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for installation, setup, maintenance, and/or operation of the Platinum IP3.
E
F
G
B
C
Revision History
Edition Date
A
Comments
December 2012 Preliminary Version
January 2013 First Release
October 2014 Third Release
D
H
February 2015
Support for PX-RES in Platinum 5 RU and 9 RU Frames.
See PX-RES in a Platinum frame (on page 41)
October 2015 New 15 RU Platinum IP3 frame
December 2015 Minor edits to add PoE warning. See PoE (on page 36).
March 2016
June 2016
Added info on the Platinum SX Hybrid Module. See
Platinum SX Hybrid Multiviewer Modules (on page 238)
Audio Expansion support. See Audio Expansion (on
page 34 ) and Hardware Connections for Audio
Updates to firmware upgrade procedure for the PX-
ATDM64-x28 module. See Firmware Upgrade (on
Obtaining Documents
Product support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our website. Alternatively, contact your
Customer Service representative to request a document.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 14
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Unpacking/Shipping Information
Preface
Unpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected, tested, and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service.
1. Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred during transit.
2. Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list.
3. Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing.
4. Contact the carrier if any item is damaged.
5. Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated components before you install the unit.
Keep at least one set of original packaging, in the event that you need to return a product for servicing.
Returning a Product
In the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly, please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number, and then send the unit back for servicing.
Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service.
If the original package is not available, you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteria:
The packaging must be able to withstand the product’s weight.
The product must be held rigid within the packaging.
There must be at least 2 in. (5 cm) of space between the product and the container.
The corners of the product must be protected.
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and, if possible, in the original packaging material. If the product is still within the warranty period, we will return the product prepaid after servicing.
Safety
This manual contains safety precautions and recommendations specific to the IP3 controller product.
The IP3 controller is rack-mountable using rack rails provided with the unit, and it is strongly recommended to do so. See the specifications section for the electrical current load of the product, and connect the redundant power supplies to electrical circuits which are each capable of supplying the full load of the unit. The IP3 controller is forced-air cooled; to prevent marring during handling and transit there are clear plastic coatings which cover the metallic surfaces and obstruct some of the air ventilation holes. Be sure to remove all of these clear plastic coatings before putting the unit into service.
IMPORTANT! Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 15
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 1: Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual
WARNING
Statements identifying conditions or practices that may result in
personal injury or loss of life. High voltage is present.
CAUTION
Statements identifying conditions or practices that can result in
damage to the equipment or other property.
Preface
Standards
Refer to the IP3 Safety and Standards Manual for details.
Waste from Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
The European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) deals with the collection, treatment, recovery, and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products. The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products. As of August 13, 2005, the producers or users of these products were required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life, and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods. (Some EU member states may have different deadlines.)
In accordance with this EU Directive, companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled. (See our website for more information.)
Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling.
Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem.
Figure 1: WEEE Compliance Emblem
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 16
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Introduction
Introduction
Platinum IP3 Overview
The Platinum IP3™ Intelligent Signal Routing System provides unprecedented scalability and flexibility to designers of new broadcast facilities, OB production vehicles, and other television switching, monitoring, and transmission facilities worldwide.
The Platinum IP3 features enhanced crosspoint and switching architectures which allow scalability to extremely large systems, coupled with a new frame design for improved density and reliability in large system configurations.
The Platinum IP3 Router is available in the following frame sizes:
28 RU (PX-FR-28) frame supporting matrices up to 576x1024
15 RU (PX-FR-15) frame supporting matrices up to 288x512
Product Description
The Platinum IP3 routing switcher system extends both the matrix size and functionality of Imagine
Communications' routing switcher product line. Its flexible modular architecture accommodates standard definition, high definition, and 1080p digital video signals while keeping a versatile frame and control system. This combination allows high performance, multi-format video, audio and embedded audio routing within a single, flexible frame.
The Platinum IP3 routing switcher system provides video matrix expandability (9x16) to 576×1024 in a
single 28 RU frame or 288x512 in a single 15 RU frame. The 9×16 building block provides ideal growth and flexibility for mixed applications such as high definition and serial digital interface, and other integrated processing opportunities such as analog and/or digital conversion. With its ability to route signals ranging from 3.0 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s, the IP3 router offers a clear growth path from lower bit rate signals to high bandwidth, high definition format signals. This router will also handle both AES and polarity sensitive ASI/SSI signal formats.
Platinum IP3 28 RU (PX-FR-28) and 15 RU (PX-FR-15) Frames
The flagship frame in the Platinum IP3 system is a 28RU frame, featuring 576 wideband video inputs distributed across 64 modular slots, and 1024 wideband video outputs distributed across 64 modular slots. This can expand to 1152x1024 in two 28RU frames, while providing 2N redundant crosspoint (XPT) modules. See Video Matrix Expansion.
The 28RU Platinum IP3 frame provides a large matrix size via new crosspoint (XPT) modules, a new backplane (MI), and new Input/Output (I/O) modules. A new resource module (PX-RES) provides greater processing capacity, and an upgraded version of the Platinum TDM crosspoint module allows for the increased matrix capacity.
The Platinum IP3 15 RU is a compact version of the larger Platinum IP3 28 RU high-performance router, delivering the same integrated routing and processing capabilities in a space-saving 288x512 form factor. This provides mobile and other production environments with significant cost-, space- and power-efficiency improvements.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 17
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Introduction
The 15RU Platinum IP3 frame features 288 wideband video inputs distributed across 32 modular slots, and 512 wideband video outputs distributed across 32 modular slots. This can expand to 576x512 across two 15 RU frames, while providing 2N redundant crosspoint (XPT) modules.
Both (15 RU and 28 RU) frames use common, front-loadable, and hot-swappable input and output modules. The Platinum IP3 frames use unique Video and Audio Crosspoint modules which are not compatible with Platinum frames. The frame has a passive module interconnect (MI) signal distribution module interconnecting the routing system.
The frame is accessible from the front via a removable door. Status LEDs can be viewed through this door; these LEDs indicate power supply presence (and status), resource module usage, and link light indicators for Ethernet communications ports. Four 1500 watt power supplies are present. Frames with conversion or advanced processing options may require additional power supplies; or additional power supplies may be added for redundancy.
Status LEDs on Power Supply units, Resource cards, and various I/O modules are visible when the door is open. Alarms on various modules are reported to the Platinum IP3 Controller to ease hardware management of the system.
The Platinum IP3 frame is designed to be compliant with NEBS certification requirements (for example, module retention doors, non-removable door option, locking power supplies, etc.). The frame is compatible with router control software products such as Magellan CCS Navigator and can also be controlled via a web based Controller.
Features
Routing for Large Systems
576x1024 in a single 28RU frame
1152x1024 in two 28RU frames
576x2048 in two 28RU frames
1152x2048 in four 28RU frames
1152x3072 in six 28RU frames
Video Routing
HD-SDI digital multirate from 3.00 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s
Digital video signals including SMPTE 310, SDI, ASI, HD-SDI
Analog video via conversion to/from SDI on I/O modules
Audio Routing
Digital audio signals including balanced and unbalanced (coaxial) AES
Analog stereo audio via conversion to/from AES on I/O modules
MADI audio - Embedded audio with the use of Audio De-multiplexing and Multiplexing boards
Module I/O in groups of 8 or 9 inputs and 8 or 16 outputs
Route to/from digital and analog signals with no external processing
Front-loading, hot swappable modules
Redundancy (power supplies, resource modules, signal paths) throughout
Enhanced control and monitoring capabilities
Secure access rights with restrictions by level, source, and destination
CCSP, SNMP, and third-party protocol support
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 18
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Platinum IP3 Architecture
Introduction
The Platinum IP3's flexible modular architecture accommodates standard definition, high definition, and
1080p digital video signals while keeping a versatile frame and control system. This combination allows high performance, multi-format video, audio, and embedded audio routing within a single, flexible frame. The IP3 can switch signals from 3 Mb/s to 3Gb. It can pass and reclock SD-SDI (including 143, 177,
270, 360, and 540 Mb/s), HD-SDI (1.485 Gb/s), as well as 3G-SDI signals, supporting routing of SD/HD/3G signals in the same router.
The Platinum wideband video and audio TDM switching fabrics (which allow for non-blocking audio processing) have been retained.
To support audio matrix expansion between two IP3 frames, the internal Audio Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) buses are Time-division multiplexed onto a higher speed TDM bus operating at 3
Gbits/s each and carried over 16 DensiShield channels. This requires a minimum of two DensiShield cables – one for outputs distribution and a second for input distribution or four cables if redundancy is desired. With the Platinum IP3's Audio Expansion option, a two frame system is fully non-blocking, meaning that audio inputs (embedded or discrete) in frame one can be routed to any output in frame two.
Removing the Frame Door
Note: While you can just open the front door of the Frame, you may want to remove it completely when you need better access to Modules.
While pressing in the chrome locking pin, lift the door off the hinge and remove.
Figure 2: 28 RU IP3 Frame and close up of locking pin
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 19
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 3: 15 RU IP3 Frame and close up of locking pin
Introduction
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 20
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Frame Architecture
28 RU Platinum IP3 Front View
Power Supplies
Outputs 1-256
MI Backplane
Outputs 257-512
PT-SYNC 1&2
Resource Modules (PX-RES) 1&2
Outputs 513-768
Outputs 769-1024
Power Supplies
Figure 4: 28 RU Frame viewed from the front
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Introduction
Power Supplies
Video Crosspoint 1
Inputs 1-144
Front Fans
Inputs 145-288
Audio TDM Crosspoint 1&2
Inputs 289-432
Video Crosspoint 2
Inputs 433-576
Power Supplies
June 2016 | Page 21
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
15 RU Platinum IP3 Front View
Power Supplies
Outputs 1-256
Video Crosspoint 1
Video Crosspoint 2
Outputs 257-512
PT-SYNC 1&2
Resource Modules
(PX-RES) 1&2
Figure 5: 15 RU Frame viewed from the front
Power Supplies
Inputs 1-144
Front Fans
Introduction
Inputs 145-288
Audio TDM Crosspoint 1&2
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 22
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
28 RU Platinum IP3 Rear View
Introduction
Figure 6: 28 RU Frame Rear View
Important: Rear Filler plates (required to maintain proper airflow in the frame and for Electro-Magnetic compliance) are installed by Imagine Communications Manufacturing to block the empty I/O slots. 1 slot, 8 slot, and 16 slot plates are available. If a Rear Filler plate is removed to install a new module, the empty slots should be closed with a Filler plate.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 23
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
15 RU Platinum IP3 Rear View
Input Back
Modules
Introduction
Rear Fans
AC/DC Rear
Panel
Output Back
Modules
Alarm and
Expansion Module
Figure 7: 15 RU Frame Rear View
Communications
Back Panel
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 24
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
28 RU Platinum IP3 Frame Architecture
Introduction
Figure 8: Platinum IP3 28 RU Frame Architecture
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 25
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
15 RU Platinum IP3 Frame Architecture
Introduction
Figure 9: Platinum IP3 15 RU Frame Architecture
Platinum IP3 Physical Specifications
Table 2: Platinum IP3 Physical Specifications
PLATINUM IP3
Architecture
Dimensions
28 RU
PX-FR-28
15 RU
PX-FR-15
17.5 in. (44.5 cm Width
Depth
17.5 in. (44.5 cm)
18.5 in.(46.7cm)
23.5 in. including rear fans
18.5 in.(46.7cm)
23.5 in. including rear fans
Height
Weight fully loaded (approx)
Matrix Size
49.0 in.(124.5 cm) 26.3 in
172 kg
576x1024
145lbs (65.8kg)
288x512
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
PLATINUM
28 RU
PT-FR-28
17.5 in. (44.5 cm)
15 RU
PT-FR-15
17.5 in. (44.5 cm)
18.5 in.(46.7cm) 18.5 in.(46.7cm)
49.0 in.(124.5 cm)
26.25 in.(66.7 cm)
350 lb (159 kg) 210 lb (95 kg)
512x512 256x256
June 2016 | Page 26
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PLATINUM IP3
Architecture
28 RU
PX-FR-28
Matrix Module Capacity
Input Slots
64
Output Slots
Video Crosspoint Slots
64
2 (1 redundant)
Resource Slots
2 (1 redundant)
TDM Slots
Sync Slots
2 (1 redundant)
2 (1 redundant)
PSU Slots
8
Monitoring Slots
Alarm Slots
1
1
Streaming Slots
NA
Standard Equipment
Power Supply
Fans (Rear, Front)
Upgrade Options
Redundant Power Supply
Redundant Resource Module
Redundant Sync Options
Redundant Crosspoint
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
15 RU
PX-FR-15
32
32
2 (1 redundant)
2 (1 redundant)
4
1
2 (1 redundant)
2 (1 redundant)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PLATINUM
28 RU
PT-FR-28
64
15 RU
PT-FR-15
32
64 32
2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Introduction
8
4
2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
4
4
1
NA
1
1
1
1
4 2 4 2
6 front + 7 rear fans 6 front + 4 rear fans 2 fan modules 1 fan module
Frame Modules
The Platinum IP3 frame is divided into sections for Input, Output, Crosspoint, and Control modules.
Frame modular components include the following items:
Type
Input
Module
Input
Description
Input Modules
See List of Supported Input and Output Modules (on page 38)
Slots in 28 RU Slots in 15 RU
64 32
Output Output Output Modules
See List of Supported Input and Output Modules (on page 38)
Crosspoint Video
Crosspoint
Audio
Crosspoint
Video Crosspoint
See Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G)
ATDM Crosspoint
See Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28) (on page
64
2
2
32
2
2
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 27
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Type
Control
Module
PX-RES
PX-ALARM-
DATA
PX-BP-28
PX-BP-15
PX-SYNC-
MI
Description
Resource Module
Provides control logic for an IP3 frame.
See Resource Module (PX-RES) (on page 41)
Alarm Module
Monitors power supplies and rear fans; provides LEDs and relay alarm contacts for both and allows custom alarm configurations based on parameters within a frame (for example, signal presence, etc.)
See Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM) (on page 55)
Module Interconnect (Backplane)
Provides central signal distribution module for the frame between input, output, and crosspoint modules.
See Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15) (on page 280)
Sync Module Interconnect
The Sync (and optional redundant sync) module are located above the Resource Module. They are visible when the front panel door is opened.
See Sync Module Interconnect (PX-SYNC-MI) (on page 291)
Power and
Cooling
PX-PS
PX-PD-TOP
PX-PD-BOT
PX-PWR-
ADPTR
Power Supply Module
Four Power Supplies supply the core components for each frame.
Frames with conversion or advanced processing options may require additional power supplies; or additional power supplies may be added for redundancy.
See 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Power Distribution Modules
Interfaces with Power Supplies and distributes power to an IP3 system.
See External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) (on page 245)
Fan Modules
See Front Fan Module (on page 263)
PX-TOP-
FAN
PX-BOT-
FAN
(28 RU)
PX-FRONT-
FAN
(15 RU)
PX-REAR-
FAN
(28 RU and
15 RU)
PX-AUX
Fan Module (Rear)
See Rear Fan Module (on page 267)
Auxiliary Board
Auxiliary board for providing power to Front Fan modules.
See Auxiliary Module (PX-AUX) (on page 288).
Power Adapter
Board used for connecting power from External Power Supply frame (PX-FR-EXPS) to boards within the IP3 frame.
See Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-ADPTR) (on page 292).
2
1
1
2
2
1
Introduction
Slots in 28 RU Slots in 15 RU
2
1
1
2
4
1
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 28
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Consumption
Introduction
Power Consumption of Frame and Input/Output Modules
Table 3: Power Consumption
Module Type
Resource
Alarm
Alarm (No Expansion)
Alarm (Expansion)
Video Crosspoint (28 RU)
Video Crosspoint (15 RU)
Audio Crosspoint
Front Fan Top (28 RU only)
Front Fan Bot (28 RU only)
Front Fan (15 RU)
Rear Fan (15/28 RU)
Rear Fan Adapter
Module
PX-RES
PX-ALARM-ATDM
PX-ALARM-DATA
PX-ALARM-DATA
PX-576x1024-3G
PX-288x512-3G
PX-ATDM64-X28
PX-FRONT-FAN-TOP
55W
55.2W
PX-FRONT-FAN-BOT 55.2W
PX-FRONT-FAN
PX-REAR-FAN
PX-REAR-FAN-ADPTR 0
55.2W
67W
24V Power Rail
15W
2W
0.35W
6W
236W
110W
Digital Video Input Module PX-HSR9C-IBG
Digital Video Optical Input Module PX-HSR9O-IBG
Digital Video Input Module PX-HSR9C1D-IBG
Digital Video Optical Input Module PX-HSR9O1D-IBG
Digital Video Input Module PX-HSR16C-OBG
Digital Video Optical Input Module PX-HSR16O-OBG
Digital Video Optical Input Module with DensiShield
PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG
Digital Video Input Module with
DensiShield
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG
Framesync and Multiplexer
Framesync and Demultiplexer
PT-FSDMX-IBG
PT-FSDMXO-IBG
Framesync and Demultiplexer with
DensiShield
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG
LEGACY PLATINUM MODULES
Module
PT-MADI4C-IBG
PT-MADI4O-IBG
PT-MADI4C-OBG
PT-MADI4O-OBG
10.7W
14W
13W
16.3W
11.7W
21.9W
18W
14.1W
50W
52W
52W
Consumption
15W
18W
22W
25W
0.8W
0.82W
0.82W
0.82W
0
0.15W
0.43W
0.43W
0.43W
0.43W
0.43W
0.43W
0.43W
5V Power Rail
0W
0.35W
0.35W
0.4W
0.1W
0.1W
0.43W
0.15W
0.15W
0.15W
14.53W
50.15W
52.15W
52.15W
Total Power
15W
2.35W
0.7W
6.4W
236.1W
110.1W
55.8W
56.02W
56.02W
56.02W
67W
0.15W
11.13W
14.43W
13.43W
16.73W
12.13W
22.33W
18.43W
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 29
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Module Type Module
PT-ADCT-IB
PT-DACT-OB
PT-AECT-IB
PT-AEBT-IB
PT-AECT-OB
PT-AEBT-OB
PT-DEC-IB
PT-ENC-OB
24V Power Rail
24.7W
14.7W
2.4W
6.5W
13W
10W
5V Power Rail
Introduction
Total Power
Platinum IP3 Power and Temperature Specifications
The specifications in this section are for the Platinum IP3 frame and system-wide components.
Specifications for individual modules are listed with their detailed descriptions. Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 4: Power Supply Specifications
Item
Power
Specification
Maximum 1500W power supply
Output
Current sharing
V1 = +5 VDC @ 10A
V2 = +24 VDC @ 62A
FET Isolated
Hot Swappable
Performance temperature 41°F (5°C) to 104°F (40°C) at 100% power rating
Operating temperature 32° F (0°C) to 122°F (50°C) at 100% power rating
Efficiency = 80 Plus Gold (87% @ 20% and 100% load, 90% at 50% load)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 30
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Expansion Overview
Introduction
The Platinum IP3 Frame, when used in isolation, provides a 576x1024 (28 RU) or 288x512 matrix (15
RU) with 9 Inputs per Input Slot and 16 Outputs per Output Slot.
Video Matrix Expansion
Video frame expansion is achieved via the secondary switching capabilities of the output card. The number of Outputs can be expanded by distributing Input signals to one or more Frames. Expansionenabled output cards transmit the required inputs/outputs via two DensiShield cables, each of which is capable of transmitting eight high speed differential pair signals. The techniques of Input and Output Matrix Expansion can be combined to produce very large routing systems.
Output Matrix Expansion
Matrix Expansion Input Modules help distribute input signals across multiple frames that are connected using DensiShield cables. For example, if you route the Inputs of one Frame to a second frame, you have twice the original number of Outputs.
Across 2 frames
Across 3 frames
28 RU
576x2048 router
576x3072 router
15 RU
288x1024 router
288x1536 router
Input Matrix Expansion
Input Matrix Expansion is achieved by cross-connecting Output Modules across frames. This allows for an increased number of Inputs available for routing to each Output. Through Input
Matrix expansion, you can build:
28 RU 15 RU
Across 2 frames 576x2048 router 576x512 router
Audio Matrix Expansion
For Audio, TDM is combined into 8 DensiShield channels (3 Gb/s each) for distribution. This requires a minimum of two DensiShield cables– one for output distribution and a second for input distribution, or four cables if redundancy is desired.
Expansion Setup
To set up expansion, click the Expansion Setup button in the Hardware Foundry.
The following types of expansion are supported:
Matrix expansion
System expansion (Video)
Audio expansion
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 31
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Introduction
Matrix Expansion
Matrix Expansion Input Modules help distribute input signals across 2 or more frames, connected via
DensiShield cables. By routing the inputs of one frame to another, you double the original number of outputs; if you route to 2 frames, you triple the number of outputs.
Note: Matrix expansion does not require the use of the Expansion Setup UI.
Matrix expansion is configured in the IP3 Database Editor at the Source level, using a Device Type with
2 Video Channels. The Device Type itself should be defined though the DB Editor in Navigator. Follow the wizard to create a Video Device Type (for example, HD video), and then add another Video based
Connection Type to it (for example, HD Video again).
Figure 10: Example of Device Type with 2 Video channels
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 32
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Introduction
Map the input on the first frame to one video channel, and the map corresponding expanded input on the second frame to the second video channel.
For example, consider the case of two IP3 Frames, F1 and F2. Both have cards in Slot 1, and the inputs of the card in F1, Slot 1 can be expanded to F2, Slot 1 (via DensiShield cable connecting the two).
System Expansion
System Expansion allows for multiple frames in your system to be ganged together to form a larger routing system. System expansion is basically input matrix expansion. Cross connecting output modules across frames allows for an increased number of Inputs available for routing.
For example, you can build an 1152x1024 matrix across two 28 RU frames (increasing the inputs from
576 to 1152), or a 576x512 matrix across two 15 RU frames (increasing the inputs from 288 to 576).
To set up System Expansion:
1. Click the Expansion Setup button in the Hardware Foundry.
2. In the Expansion Setup dialog, select System Expansion from the Type drop-down
3. Select the first frame from the Frame drop-down list
4. Select the frame to connect it to from the second Frame drop-down list
5. Click the Add Connection button
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 33
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Introduction
Figure 11: System Configuration - System Expansion
Once created, connections will be displayed in the Defined Expansion Connections section.
In case of system expansion, you cannot break away the audio separately. If you need to, set up Audio
Expansion (see Audio Expansion (on page 34)) in addition to System expansion.
Note: A single frame can be used in a maximum of one audio expansion and one system expansion connection.
Audio Expansion
Audio Expansion functions like System Expansion, but at the Audio level, allowing for Audio to be available to other frames.
To set up audio expansion:
1. Click the Expansion Setup button in the Hardware Foundry.
2. Select Audio Expansion from the Type drop-down
3. Select the first frame from the Frame drop-down list
4. Select the frame to connect it to from the second Frame drop-down list
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 34
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
5. Click the Add Connection button
Introduction
Figure 12: System Configuration - Audio Expansion
Once created, audio expansion connections will be displayed in the Defined Expansion Connections section.
Note: A single frame can be used in a maximum of one audio expansion and one system expansion connection.
In addition to the Audio expansion definition in the UI, ensure you make the required physical
connections - see Hardware Connections for Audio Expansion (on page 86).
Alarms and LEDs
Status LEDs on power supply units, resource cards, and various input/output modules are visible when the door is open.
Alarms on various modules are reported to the Platinum IP3 Controller to ease hardware management of the system.
LED indicators reflect the status of sub-systems inside the frame. The indicators for each power supply provide information on each voltage rail and the power supply’s fan. The indicators from each resource module provide status information of the frame’s resource module. These indicators are lit green when the system is functioning properly and red if a failure condition exists
For details on Alarms and LEDs, see:
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM) (on page 55)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 35
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Control Features
Introduction
Your Platinum IP3 router makes use of the most innovative control systems available on the market today. The operating system used for the Platinum IP3 router is a real-time embedded operating system that uses an interrupt-driven and priority-based task scheduling algorithm to control the operations of the Platinum IP3 router. This means that switches will occur in a timely manner, which allows the router to be used in broadcast facilities where timing is crucial to the success of the facility.
The new Control System is the driving force behind the Platinum IP3 routing system. This new control system breaks the traditional constraints of hard levels and fixed partitions, enabling unmatched flexibility in grouping and routing signals according to signal attributes - a key need in complex multichannel audio facilities and mixed HD/SD workflows.
Platinum IP3 Modules can be accessed and controlled via the web-based Platinum IP3 Controller.
For details, see the Platinum IP3 Controller User Manual integrated with the firmware.
PoE
The Platinum IP3 control network is designed to be a closed system. No other IP devices should be placed on this network to avoid conflicts and excess traffic. Further, it has been found that PoE (power over Ethernet) generating devices must not be used as these devices can cause damage to the PX-RES module.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 36
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Modules
Modules
Modules Overview
The Platinum IP3 router's modular architecture consists of separate Input and Output modules - each of which contains 8 or 9 inputs and 8 or 16 outputs - and Crosspoint matrices (redundant crosspoint paths can be configured for robust operation).
Depending on the configuration, one or more modules may be present in the frame for various optional functions.
Input and Output Modules (on page 37 )
Crosspoint Modules (on page 39)
Monitoring Modules
Input and Output Modules
Input and Output modules are front-loadable and hot-swappable. They utilize high-density BNCs (HD-
BNC) through which, physical connections of 576x1024 are achieved in 28RU, and 288x512 in 15 RU.
Video Frame expansion is achieved by utilizing the secondary switching capabilities of the output card.
Expansion-enabled output cards transmit the required I/O via two DensiShield cables, each of which can transmit eight high speed (differential pair) signals.
Input modules are located on the right side of the frame, and Output modules are located on the left side, as viewed from the front when the front panel door is opened. Both module types are visible from the front when the front panel door is opened.
See PX-IB Input Module General Overview (on page 101 ) for a generic description of Input Modules.
See PX-OB Output Module General Overview for a generic description of Output Modules.
See List of Supported Input and Output Modules (on page 38) for a specific list of modules.
Note: Platinum IP3 modules can be damaged if they are plugged into the wrong back modules or wrong slot. Care should be exercised when plugging modules into the frame.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 37
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
List of Supported Input and Output Modules
Modules
Table 5: Platinum IP3 Input and Output Modules
Functional Type Input Module
Multichannel Audio Digital
Interface (MADI) Modules
PT-MADI4C-IBG
MADI Electrical Input Module
PT-MADI4O-IBG
MADI Optical Input Module
Output Module
PT-MADI4C-OBG
MADI Output Module with 4 Coaxial Outputs
PT-MADI4O-OBG
MADI Output Module with 4 Optical Outputs
Analog/Digital Audio
Converter Modules with
AES Balanced/Coaxial
Modules with TDM
Capability
PT-ADCT-IB
TDM conversion Input Module. 16 pairs to AES audio in TDM matrix (first 8 copied to wideband matrix)
PT-AEBT-IB
16 pairs with TDM Support (balanced)
PT-AECT-IB
16 pairs with TDM Support (coaxial)
PT-DACT-OB
32 Mono Balanced Analog Audio Output Module (16 stereo pairs) from TDM
PT-AEBT-OB
16 AES Stereo Pair Digital Audio Output Module. 16 stereo pairs from TDM (balanced)
PT-AECT-OB
16 AES Stereo Pair Digital Audio Output Module. 16 stereo pairs from TDM (coaxial)
Frame Synchronizer and
Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
Modules
PT-FSDMX-IBG
8 channel SD/HD/3G Input Module with Frame
Synchronizer and Demux for Audio TDM. 8 BNC inputs.
PX-HSRMX8X-OBG
Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output Module. 8/16
BNC/Optical outputs.
Analog Composite Video
PT-FSDMXO-IBG
8 channel SD/HD/3G Input Module with Frame
Synchronizer and Demux for Audio TDM. 8
Optical inputs through 4 SFP Optical Modules
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG
8 channel SD/HD/3G Input Module with Frame
Synchronizer. For Matrix Expansion.
PT-DEC-IB
8 Composite signals to SDI.
PT-ENC-OB
8-channel Analog Composite Video output Modules.
Digital Video Modules PX-HSR9C-IBG
9 channel SD/HD/3G digital video input module with 9 HDBNC connectors
PX-HSR16C-OBG
16-channel digital video SD/HD/3G output module.
HDBNC connectors.
PX-HSR9O-IBG
9 channel SD/HD/3G digital video optical input module with 9 fiber/5 SFP cages.
PX-HSR16O-OBG
16-channel digital video SD/HD/3G output module.
16 optical outputs through 8 SFP optical devices
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG
9 channel SD/HD/3G digital video input module with 9 HDBNC connectors and DS.
PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG
8-channel digital video SD/HD/3G output module. 8 optical SFP outputs plus DS in and out for system expansion.
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG
9 channel SD/HD/3G digital video input module with 9 optical connectors and DS.
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG
8-channel digital video SD/HD/3G output module.
HDBNC output connectors plus DS in and out for system expansion
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 38
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Rear Connectors
Output Rear Connectors
Table 6: Output Rear Connectors
Module Description
PX-HSR16C-OBP 16 HDBNC SD/HD/3G output back panel
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBP 8 HDBNC + 2 DensiShield SD/HD/3G output back panel
Modules
Input Rear Connectors
Table 7: Input Rear Connectors
Module Description
PX-HSR9C-IBP 9 HDBNC SD/HD/3G input back panel
PX-HSR9C1D-IBP 9 HDBNC/1 HDBNC output SD/HD/3G Matrix Expansion back panel
Expansion Modules
The Platinum IP3 frame supports expansion modules to provide TDM and Data Fabric interconnect with a second frame when operating in expansion mode. Expansion is achieved using output modules. There must be corresponding output cards in the primary and expansion frames for inputs to be accessible.
For cost effective input expansion, expansion-only output back modules are available.
The Expansion module serves as the physical interface to the DensiShield cable for TDM expansion. It also provides RJ-45 Jacks for GigE interfacing. The Expansion Module plugs into the bottom two slots.
Crosspoint Modules
The Platinum IP3 provides redundant crosspoint paths. By using redundant crosspoint modules, a fully
redundant path through the system is available. See Crosspoint Modules (on page 39).
The Platinum IP3 uses unique Video and Audio Crosspoint modules which are not compatible with
Platinum frames.
Table 8: Crosspoint Modules
Module Description
PX-576X1024- 3G
PX-ATDM64- X28
Video Crosspoint Module
See Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G) (see "Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-
3G/PX-288x512-3G)" on page 68)
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
See Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28) (on page 78)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 39
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Monitoring Modules
Output Monitoring Modules
The Platinum IP3 router supports one optional Output Monitoring module.
Table 9: Output Monitoring Modules
Module
PX-HSRAEC-OM
Description
Output Monitoring Module
See PX-HSRAEC-OM Output Monitoring Module (on page 65)
Multiviewer Modules
Table 10: Multiviewer Modules
Module
PX-SXP-16×3
Description
Single-slot Platinum SX Pro with 16 input channels, three HDMI outputs, and three SDI outputs
PX-SXP-16×3-O
PX-SXP-32×6
PX-SXP-32×6 -O
Single-slot Platinum SX Pro with 16 input channels, three SDI outputs, and three (fiber) optical SDI outputs
Two-slot Platinum SX Pro with 32 input channels and HDMI outputs and six SDI outputs
Two-slot Platinum SX Pro with 32 input channels, six SDI outputs, and six optical SDI outputs
PX-SXP-64×6
PX-SXP-64×6-O
PX-SXP-16×3-OD
PX-SXP-32×6-OD
PX-SXP-64×6-OD
Four-slot Platinum SX Pro with 64 input channels, six HDMI outputs, and six SDI outputs
Four-slot Platinum SX Pro with 32 input channels, six SDI outputs, and six
(fiber) optical SDI outputs
16 3G/HD/SD signals across 3x Fiber outputs. 2 DensiShield Interconnects accept 16 signals from a PX-HSRSXP2D-OBG module.
32 3G/HD/SD signals across 6x Fiber outputs. 4 DensiShield Interconnects accept 32 signals from 2 PX-HSRSXP2D-OBG modules
64 3G/HD/SD signals across 6x Fiber outputs. 8 DensiShield Interconnects accept 64 signals from 4 PX-HSRSXP2D-OBG modules
Modules
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 40
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Resource Module (PX-RES) Overview
The PX-RES Resource Module serves as the central control point for the Platinum IP3 frame and all modules that reside in the frame. The PX-RES is a control module with software and hardware components that control communications between the different processing modules (Input, Output,
Crosspoint, Fans, Power Supplies) in an IP3 frame. It also enables communication with the Platinum IP3
Controller for configuration, control, monitoring, and routing.
The PX-RES module provides the sync processing necessary to determine the switch timing for the frame. The control system reports the presence and type of sync signal detected on each of the four
SYNC inputs. The PX-RES module distributes the synchronization signals to all the crosspoint, and output monitoring modules in the frame. It also automatically generates and distributes an internal synchronization signal when no external sync input is present.
Figure 13: PX-RES Resource Module
PX-RES in a Platinum frame
The PX-RES Resource Module (1.5.0 or higher) can also be used in a Platinum 9 RU or 15 RU frame. With
PX-RES in the Platinum frame, not all modules are supported.
The following table details support for various PX and PT input/output modules when PX-RES is used in a
Platinum (9/15 RU) frame and when it's used in an IP3 frame.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 41
(PX) Output Modules
PX-HSR16C-OBG
PX-HSR8C2D-OBG
PX-HSR8O2D-OBG
PX-HSR16O-OBG
PX-HSRSXP2D-OBG
PX-HSRMX8C2D-OBG
PX-HSRMX8O2D-OBG
PX-HSR8CMX8C-OBG
PX-HSR8OMX8O-OBG
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Module PX-RES in
Platinum
(PX) Input Modules
PX-HSR9C-IBG
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG
PX-HSR9O-IBG
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG
PX-HSR8C-IBG
PM-HSR8C-IBG
PX-HSR2C2D-IBG
PX-HSR1C1D-IBG
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
PX-RES in
IP3
Module
(PT) Input Modules
PT-ADCT-IB
PM-ADCT-IB
PT-AEBT-IB
PM-AEBT-IB
PT-AECT-IB
PM-AECT-IB
PT-DEC-IB
PM-DEC-IB
PT-FSDMX-IBG/ PT-FSDMXO-IBG
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG
PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG
PT-HS-IB+
PT-HSO-PIN-IB+ (PT-HSO-IB+)
PT-HSR1D-IBG/ PT-HSR2D-IBG
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG
PT-MADI4C-IBG/ PT-MADI4O-IBG
(PT) Output Modules
PT-AEBT-OB
PM-AEBT-OB
PT-AECT-OB
PM-AECT-OB
PT-DACT-OB
PM-DACT-OB
PT-ENC-OB
PM-ENC-OB
PT-HSR-OB+
PM-HSR-OB+
PT-HSR-OBG+
PM-HSR-OBG+/ PT-HSRO-OBG+
PT-HSRMX8C-OBG
PT-HSRMX8O-OBG
Resource Module (PX-RES)
PX-RES in
Platinum
PX-RES in IP3
June 2016 | Page 42
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX) Frame Modules
PX-576x1024-3G
PX-ALARM-ATDM
PX-ALARM-DATA
PX-ATDM64-X28
PX-FRONT-FAN
PX-HSRAEC-OM
PX-RES
Multiviewer Modules
PX-SXP-16x3
PX-SXP-32x6
PX-SXP-64x6
PX-SXP-16x3-O
PX-SXP-32x6-O
PX-SXP-64x6-O
PX-SXP-16x3-OD
PX-SXP-32x6-OD
PX-SXP-64x6-OD
PX-RES Parameters and Upgrades
For details, refer the Platinum IP3 Controller User Manual.
PT-MADI4C-OBG/PT-MADI4O-OBG
PT-SR-OBG+/ PM-SR-OBG+
(PT) Frame Modules
PM-64x64-3G9
PM-128x128-3G9
PT-128x256-3G15
PT-ALARM
PM-ATDM16-X9
PT-ATDM16-X15
PT-HSRAEC-OM
PT-SYNC
Resource Module (PX-RES)
PX-RES Redundancy
Each Platinum IP3 frame can have up to two PX-RES modules operating redundantly. If one module detects failure of the other, it switches over control and continues router operation.
The Resource module and optional Redundant Resource module are located in the middle of the frame.
Resource modules are visible when the front panel door is opened.
The PX-RES module is divided into three main areas:
Processing
System Interfaces
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 43
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Communications Back Panel (PX-CBP)
Resource Module (PX-RES)
The PX-CBP communications back panel provides an interface between communications connectors and
Resource Modules. All control ports remain inactive until, and only if, the router has fully booted and has established communications.
Even in a powered-down state, a router connected to any communications system must not interfere with that system, and therefore must not violate the communications standard (RS-232, RS-422, IEEE
802, etc.) when in this state.
A temperature sensor on the PX-CBP monitors the external ambient temperature.
Figure 14: PX-CBP Communication Back Panel
The following connector types are available on the PX-CBP module:
Four Ethernet Ports (on page 45 )
Four Sync Ports (on page 46) with looping connectors
Two XY Ports (on page 50) with loop through
One LTC Bi-Directional Port (on page 47)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 44
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
User Interfaces
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Ethernet Ports
There are 4 Ethernet connectors available to users on the Communication Backplane (PX-CBP), labeled from 1 to 4:
Figure 15: Ethernet Ports on the PX-CBP Back Panel
Ethernets 1 and 2 are connected to the PX-RES in Slot 1 (Top slot)
Ethernets 3 and 4 are connected to the PX-RES in Slot 2 (Bottom slot)
Only the Active PX-RES Module’s Ethernet ports are active.
Ethernet ports on standby PX-RES modules are disabled but still physically connected (link LEDs function correctly).
Rear Ethernet Ports
IP Address 1
IP Address 2
192.168.100.250
192.168.101.250
Changing the Default IP Address of the Rear Ethernet Ports
Ethernet settings can be changed via the Controller. To do this:
1. Launch the Platinum IP3 Controller UI in a web browser, select your Platinum IP3 Frame, and click
Go to Device.
2. Click the Configure Frame link in the top right hand corner.
3. Select Ethernet Ports from the menu on the left and make changes on the right.
Note: Ethernet parameters suffixed with "1" refer to PX-RES 1, and parameters suffixed with "2" refer to PX-RES 2. Both PX-RES modules use the same IP addresses. However, the Ethernet ports of the standby PX-RES are disconnected internally to avoid address collision with the active PX-RES.
4. Select Yes against Save.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 45
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module (PX-RES)
Front Ethernet Ports
There is an Ethernet port on the front of each Resource Module (PX-RES). This Ethernet port can be used for configuring each Resource Module. The default (hard coded) IP addresses are as follows:
Table 11: Front Ethernet Ports
PX-RES 1 (Primary)
IP Address 1
IP Mask 1
Gateway Address 1
PX-RES 2 (Secondary)
IP Address 2
IP Mask 2
Gateway Address 2
169.254.3.126
255.255.255.0
169.254.3.1
169.254.3.127
255.255.255.0
169.254.3.1
Sync Ports
Each PX-CBP module includes four looping sync inputs. Each sync input automatically detects and locks to NTSC, PAL, analog HD Tri-Level, or AES signals. The control system reports the presence and type of sync signal detected on each of the four inputs. These synchronization signals are made available to and are distributed by the Resource Modules to every crosspoint and output monitoring I/O module in the frame.
Sync signals distributed from the Resource Module remain undisturbed when switching over to a redundant Resource Module. In addition, Resource Modules automatically generate and distribute an internal synchronization signal when no external sync input is present.
If needed, optional Sync Distribution Modules may be added to the frame to distribute external and internal sync signals to all Input/Output modules. These Sync Distribution Modules also support redundant operation, and have the capability to seamlessly switch over when the redundant module is removed.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 46
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module (PX-RES)
For user configurable references, 4 discrete syncs or 2 syncs with redundant inputs are supported
Sync triggering supported based on reference detection
If no sync signals present, switches occur asynchronously after a reasonable time-out period (<0.1 seconds from reception of command)
For Sync references that are present but then removed or lost, the router maintains relative vertical interval switching until a reference is detected
Also See Switch Triggering (on page 52).
Alarm Port
Reserved for future use.
LTC Bi-Directional Port
Reserved for future use.
LEDs
The following LEDs are present on the module:
Power
Active Card
ENET 1 LED
ENET 2 LED
2 Alarm LEDs
Table 12: LEDs on the PX-RES Resource Module
LED DESCRIPTION
POWER Power Supply Indicator
ENET1
ENET2
ALARM1
ALARM2
ACTRES
Green
Flashing Green
Flashing Green
Off
Red
Amber
Flashing Red
Flashing Amber
Green
Indicates that 24V is enabled on this board
Indicates there is an active connection on Ethernet Port #1 *
Indicates there is an active connection on Ethernet Port #2 *
No alarm
ALARM2 LED turns red if the synchronization process fails
ALARM1 is lit amber when the PX-RES is in fail-safe mode
ALARM2 LED flashes amber when synchronization between the active and standby
PX-RES is in progress.
ALARM1 LED flashes amber when a user sets the frame identifying LLDC parameter
On for the active PX-RES module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 47
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module (PX-RES)
* Only indicated on the Active PX-RES Module, not the redundant one.
Ensure working Ethernet connections to the redundant PX-RES module as this is not indicated via the
ENET LEDs for the redundant PX-RES module. If there is a problem with the physical ENET connection to the redundant PX-RES module, it won't be able to take over as the active PX-RES module.
There are nine LEDs behind the Card-edge Ejector handle. All of these LEDs should be ON when the
POWER LED is ON. If any one of them is OFF, it indicates a problem with a power circuit on the module.
Figure 16: Power LEDs
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 48
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Fuses
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Figure 17: Fuses on the PX-RES Resource Module
Fuses on the PX-RES Resource Module
Fuse Name Fuse Type Fuse Rating
F1 Slowblow 2 Amps
F2
F3
Slowblow
Slowblow
2 Amps
2 Amps
DIP Switches
Part Number
127-100001Q00
127-100001Q00
127-100001Q00
The RESET push button is a system reset.
On SW4, pins 1 and 2 are used to force the module to failsafe boot.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 49
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
XY Ports
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Note: The two XY ports on the rear of the Platinum IP3 frame are not used or supported in the initial release of Platinum IP3. If coaxial XY protocol is required in a system, the Imagine Communications EDGE
Router Protocol Translator can be used to interface coaxial XY networks with the Platinum IP3 Control
System.
Serial Ports
Note: The rear of the Platinum IP3 frame has 2 RS232 / RS422 Ports that do not support the XY protocol in the Platinum IP3 System Release 1.0. If Serial XY protocol is required in a system, the EDGE Router
Protocol Translator can be used to interface serial XY with the Platinum IP3Control System.
RSS-232 Pin Assignments
Table 13: RS-232 Signal Format Pin Assignments
5
6
3
4
7
8
9
Pin
1
2
Function
Frame Ground
RxD (Data received by router)
TxD (Data sent by router)
Data Terminal Ready*
Ground
Data Set Ready (DSR)*
Request to Send (RTS)**
Clear to Send (RTS)**
Frame Ground
* Pins 4 and 6 connected internally.
** Pins 7 and 8 connected internally
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 50
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
RSS-422 Pin Assignments
Table 14: RS-422 Signal Format Pin Assignments
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Pin
4
9
8
3
5
7
6
1
2
Signal (Tributary)
FG
Ta (Tx-)
Tb (Tx+)
Tc
Ra (Rx-)
Rb (Rx+)
Rc
FG
SP
Description
Frame ground
Transmitted data
(twisted pair)
Received data shield
Received data
(twisted pair)
Transmitted data shield
Frame ground
(Not connected)
Connection to Remote
Computer (Controller)
Frame ground
Ra (Rx-)
Rb (Rx+)
Received data shield
Ta (Tx-)
Tb (Tx+)
Transmitted data shield
Frame ground
(Not connected)
Resource Card Synchronization
In normal operating mode, all parameter and route changes are synchronized from the Active/Master
PX-RES to the Standby PX-RES.
When upgrading PX-RES firmware, images are also synchronized. If the alternate firmware image is activated on the active PX-RES, the alternate image on the standby PX-RES also becomes active.
If there is only a single PX-RES in the frame, the PX-RES Synchronization parameter is set to Yes and disabled (grayed out).
If a new PX-RES is inserted into the spare slot, the active PX-RES transfers all its content to the new standby PX-RES and the PX-RES Synchronization parameter is then enabled.
If the PX-RES Synchronization parameter is set to No, all the synchronization stops. Routes and parameter information of the standby PX-RES will remain as is.
Active and Standby Determination
Active and Standby states are non-volatile.
An active PX-RES remains active after a power cycle.
The standby PX-RES only becomes active if the active PX-RES is removed or in case of manual failover.
If two PX-RES modules are inserted into a frame and powered up at the same time, the PX-RES in the top slot will have higher priority.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 51
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module (PX-RES)
Sync Notes
The Sync Mode parameter (set to Auto by default) allows for configuration of switching point settings. In Auto mode, the output switches relative to the detected sync reference assigned to the module.
If Sync Mode is set to Standard, the Output Standard parameter can be used to specify the standard to use as the reference signal. The output switches relative to the specified reference.
If Sync Mode is set to Advanced, the Sync Pulse Delay parameter can be used to specify where the output switching point is relative to the reference signal. The delay is in units of microseconds.
Switch Triggering
Switch triggering supports the use of independent AES, NTSC, PAL, and tri-level HD references.
The following reference types are supported:
Table 15: Switch Triggering: Supported Reference Types
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
8
9
10
Unknown or Missing Reference
Analog 525/60
Analog 525/60 /1.001
Analog 625/50
1920x1080/60I
1920x1080/60I /1.001
1920x1080/50I
1920x1080/30P
1920x1080/30P /1.001
1920x1080/25P
1920x1080/24P
Line 10
Line 10
Line 6
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 52
20
21
22
23
16
17
18
19
24
25
26
27
11
12
13
14
15
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
1920x1080/24PsF
1920x1080/24P /1.001
1920x1080/24PsF /1.001
1280x720/60P
1280x720/60P /1.001
1280x720/50P
1280x720/30P
1280x720/30P /1.001
1280x720/25P
1280x720/24P
1280x720/24P /1.001
720x483/60P
720x576/50P
720x483/60P /1.001
1920x1080/60P
1920x1080/60P /1.001
1920x1080/50P
Line 7
Line 7
Line 10
Line 6
Line 10
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Resource Module (PX-RES)
The following reference types are supported but need to be manually configured since they are not automatically detected because of the Horizontal and Vertical rates.
Table 16: Switch Triggering: Reference Types that need to be manually configured
28
29
720x576/50I
960x576/50I
Line 6
(alias of Analog 625/50)
Line 6
(alias of Analog 625/50)
30 720x483/60I
31
32
720x483/60I /1.001
960x483/60I
Line 10
(alias of Analog 525/60)
Line 10
(alias of Analog 525/60 /1.001)
Line 10
(alias of Analog 525/60)
33 960x483/60I /1.001
34
35
36
1920x1080/30PsF
1920x1080/30PsF /1.001
1920x1080/25PsF
Line 10
(alias of Analog 525/60 /1.001)
Line 7
(alias of 1080/60I)
Line 7
(alias of 1080/59.94I)
Line 7
(alias of 1080/50I)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 53
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Alarms
Resource Module (PX-RES)
All alarms are off by default, except for critical temperature alarms. Individual alarms can be turned on or off. The following error conditions can trigger an alarm:
Loss of input or output signal
Power supply failure
Fan failure or missing front fan modules
Video crosspoint reaching critical temperature
PX-RES synchronization failure
Power Consumption
Table 17: PX-RES Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 15W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
Modules in Frame
0W
15W each
2 (Primary and Secondary)
Installation
All communications back panel modules are installed at Imagine Communications' manufacturing facility
The module is replaceable, however, all control and communication with the frame will be lost when it is replaced. If you need to upgrade or replace this module, please contact our Customer Service
Department.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 54
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
The Alarm Expansion module (PX-ALARM) controls and monitors the Rear Fan modules and the GPI
Inputs and Power Supplies.
The PX-ALARM module reports the status of the Rear Fans (Tachometer reading), Internal and External
Power Supply Alarms, and GPI Inputs, to the IP3 Controller via the Resource Module (PX-RES), and to
LEDs and GPI Outputs on the PX-ALARM (Platinum IP3 frame rear). The PX-ALARM can control four GPI
Outputs.
The module is located to the mid-left of the 28RU frame and to the bottom left of the 15RU frame, and is accessible from the rear of the frame. The module is hot-swappable but when unplugged from the frame, the Front and Rear Fans speed will increase to 100%. The PX-ALARM controls the speed of the rear fans based on power supply loading.
Figure 18: PX-ALARM Module in an Platinum IP3 Frame
Figure 19: PX-ALARM Module
You can expand audio across 2 frames by connecting DensiShield cables across PX-ALARM modules in
two frames. See Audio Expansion (on page 34 ).
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 55
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-ALARM Components
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
The PX-ALARM module consists of two cards assembled together as a single module (PX-ALARM), and plugged into the rear of the Platinum IP3 frame.
PX-ALARM-ATDM
PX-ALARM-DATA
Audio TDM Expansion and Alarm Card
Data Expansion and Alarm Card
The Platinum IP3 frame has two rows of connectors for the PX-ALARM module. Each slot consists of one
60-pin and one 140-pin Samtec card-edge connector. The PX-ALARM-DATA card goes into one slot, and the PX-ALARM-ATDM card goes into the other one. Both are assembled as a single module and inserted into the frame.
The PX-ALARM-ATDM and PX-ALARM-DATA modules can be accessed via the Controller Web UI under the Control Cards for a frame.
Controlling Fan Speed
Under normal operating conditions fan speed is controlled by power consumption of the frame (which directly corresponds to heat generated in the frame), and ambient temperature. The more cooling that is required the faster the fans will spin.
The following conditions will trigger the fan speeds to increase:
Failure of a Rear Fan Module
Loss of communication to the Resource module (PX-RES)
PX-ALARM Module failure
Unplugging the PX-ALARM module from the IP3 frame
Upgrading the PX-ALARM Module's firmware
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 56
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Reporting Alarms and Fan Failures
PX-ALARM monitors the status signal of core components and reports any instance of a critical failure.
Reporting is done to the Platinum IP3 Controller via the Resource card (PX-RES) and to the GPI Outputs and LEDs.
Alarm Type Alarm Details
Power Supply Zone Redundancy (on page 58) Redundancy by power zone
Power Supply Status (on page 57)
Status on each of the power supplies in the frame and external power supplies.
(Inputs 1-3)
Ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/failures and report these failures through control software such as Navigator
4
3 GPI Output Alarms (User Configurable Alarms)
The alarm module communicates directly to the resource module via the proprietary PIPE (single-wire serial) interface.
This communication provides access to any status signal reported in the entire frame.
Fan Failure Alarm (on page 60)
Status on Rear Fans 1
Number of
Alarms
1
Power Supply Status
PX-ALARM reports status of internal/external power supply alarms, power consumption, and internal power supply temperature over an I2C interface. The I2C signals from the power supplies within the
Platinum IP3 frame are connected to the PX-ALARM-ATDM module.
External Power Supply frames can be connected to the Platinum IP3 frame via DC power cables. The DC power cables are connected to the Power Adapter boards. The Alarm and I2C signals from the External
Power Supplies are routed through the BackPlane/MI to the PX-ALARM-DATA board.
Status is reported for each of the Power Supplies, classified by zone.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 57
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
In case of a 28RU frame:
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
PSU 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 in zones 1-4 refer to the power supplies in the frame
PSU 9/10/11/12/13/14/15/16 in zones 1-4 refer to external power supplies
PSU 5/6/7/8/13/14/15/16 will show as N/A (these are for 28 RU frames only)
In case of a 15 RU frame:
PSU 1/2/3/4 in zones 1/2 refer to the power supplies in the frame
PSU 9/10/11/12 in zones 1/2 refer to external power supplies
PSU 5/6/7/8/13/14/15/16 will show as N/A (these are for 28 RU frames only)
Each power supply provides a power supply present signal and three critical alarms: +24V, +5V, and FAN
Failure. All three alarms are critical to power supply and frame operation. If any of these alarms are asserted:
The Platinum IP3 Controller is notified via the Resource card
The PS ALM LED on the PX-ALARM is illuminated red
The dedicated Power Supply Alarm GPI Output is asserted/triggered.
If no alarm conditions exist, the PS ALM LED is not illuminated and GPI Output is not asserted.
Power Supply Zone Redundancy
There are 4 power zones in a 28 RU frame and 2 power zones in a 15 RU frame. Zone redundancy is reported via the PX-ALARM-DATA module.
Note that the UI displays 4 zones even in case of the 15 RU Platinum IP3 frame which has only 2 zones.
Zones 3 and 4 will show as N/A for a 15 RU frame.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 58
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
GPI Input Alarms
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
User-defined inputs 1 to 3 provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/ failures and to report these failures to the Controller via the Resource card (PX-RES). If any GPI Input is asserted, the corresponding GPI Input LED on the PX-ALARM module will be lit.
GPI Output Alarms (User Configurable Alarms)
The Resource Module (PX-RES) communicates the status of alarm conditions within the IP3 frame via user-defined GPI outputs 1 through 4 to the PX-ALARM module. When a GPI Output is asserted, the corresponding GPO LED is lit on the PX-ALARM module.
Figure 20: User Definable Alarms
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 59
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Fan Failure Alarm
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Rear Fans status is reported via the PX-ALARM-DATA module. You can see status for individual rear fans as well as individual fan speed.
If any of the Rear fan modules have a failure:
This alarm condition is reported to the Platinum IP3 Controller via the Resource card
The FAN ALM LED on the PX-ALARM module is illuminated
The Fan Alarm GPI Output is asserted/triggered
General Purpose Interface (GPI)
GPI connections to the PX-ALARM module are via a Micro DB25 connector on the front card edge of the
PCB. The GPI Inputs are non-isolated inputs. A contact closure to ground asserts/triggers the GPI Input.
Figure 21: GPI Inputs
A 1k Ohm series resistor and clamping diode are connected to each Input, to protect the Input from over voltage.
The GPI Outputs are electrically isolated using a Relay with 3 contacts. Access to all 3 contacts of the relay have been provided to allow for defining the preferred method of signaling critical faults.
Table 18: GPI Output Descriptions
NC Normally closed; contact shorted with common when alarm condition exists or frame not powered.
NO
COMMON
Normally open; contact shorted with common when alarm does not exist and frame is powered
Reed (Return of the Relay)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 60
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-ALARM
CONTROL
NO
COM
NC
Figure 22: GPI Outputs
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Figure 23: Micro DSUB connector pin numbering
Micro-Dsub Connector Pinouts
Table 19: GPI Pinout
Pin Description
1 Remote in 3
2 Common (User-defined 1)
3 Normally closed (User-defined 1)
4 Normally open (User-defined 1)
5 Common (User-defined 2)
6 Normally closed (User-defined 2)
7 Normally open (User-defined 2)
8 Common (User-defined 3)
9 Normally closed (User-defined 3)
10 Normally open (User-defined 3)
11 Common (User-defined 4)
12 Normally closed (User-defined 4)
13 Normally open (User-defined 4)
Pin Description
14 Normally closed (Power supply alarm)
15 Normally open (Power supply alarm)
16 Common (Power supply alarm)
17 Normally closed (Fan alarm)
18 Normally open (Fan alarm)
19 Common (Fan alarm)
20 Floating
21 Remote in 1
22 GND (Common in 1)
23 Floating
24 Remote in 2
25 GND (Common in 2 and 3)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 61
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameters
PX-ALARM-DATA Parameters
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Table 20: PX-ALARM-DATA Parameters
Category Name
Root Power Good
Description
Informs the user if board is experiencing any power issues
PS Alarm
Reports if any of the power supplies have failed or if there is a loss of power redundancy.
PSU PS Zone Redundancy
PS Zone Redundancy (1-4)
(Table Parameter)
Power Supply
PS Status (1-16)
Reports Power Zone redundancy status
Reports individual power supply status
Type Options
RO
RO
No
Yes
No
Yes
RO
RO
No
Yes
PS Zone
PS +5VL Failed
PS +24VL Failed
PS Fan Failed
PS Ambient Temperature
PS Secondary Temperature
PS +5VL Current
PS +24VL Current
The Zone the power supply provides power to
RO
Reports if the power supply is providing
5VL power.
Reports if the power supply is providing
24VL power.
RO
RO
Reports if the power supply fan is in working order.
RO
Reports the temperature of the air coming into the PSU Fan.
RO
Reports the temperature of the air coming out of the PSU Fan.
5V current is being drawn from the power supply.
RO
RO
24V current is being drawn from the power supply.
RO
Good
Failed
Not Present
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
-55~125C
-55~125C
0~100Amps
0~100Amps
Alarm Alarm
External Alarm Enable RW
External Alarm Trigger
Enable external alarm. Set based on whether the alarm is enabled, GPI status, and trigger value.
Set the alarm trigger RW
No
Yes
N/A
Low
High
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 62
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Category Name
External Alarm
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Description
Reports if an external alarm has been enabled
User Configurable Alarm
User Configurable Alarm (1-4) Triggers a GPO to an external system
Type Options
RO
No
Yes
RW
Rear Fans Rear Fan Speed (1-7) Reports the speed in RPM of the fan RO
No
Yes
N/A
0-7000rpm
Rear Fan Failed (1-7) Set to yes if there is a loss of communication to the fan or fan is spinning too slow.
RO
No
Yes
PX-ALARM-ATDM Parameters
Table 21: PX-ALARM-ATDM Parameters
Name
Power Good
Description
Reports if the board is experiencing any power issues
TDM Cable Present (1-4)
(Table Parameter)
Type
RO
Set to yes if there is a densishield cable plugged in. RO
Options
No
Yes
No
Yes
Status and Alarm LEDs
The PX-ALARM maintains standard reporting LEDs in addition to the status of alarms. All LEDs are visible from the rear of the frame.
D5
D6
D7
D8
D2
D3
D4
Table 22: Status and Alarm LEDs
LED
Reference
D1
Function
GPO 1
GPO 2
GPO 3
GPO 4
GPI Input 1
GPI Input 2
Power supply Alarm (PS ALM)
Fan Alarm (FAN ALM)
Turns red when GPO output (condition defined by user is asserted true)
Turns red when GPI Input1 is asserted (contact closure to ground)
Turns red when GPI input 2 is asserted (contact closure to ground)
Turns red when any present power supply’s alarm is asserted/triggered.
Turns red when any fans fail
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 63
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
LED
Reference
D9
Function
Control LED (CTRL)
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
D10
D11
+24V Power Supply (+24V)
GPI Input 1
Initializes red, turns green when communication with the Resource card (PX-
RES) is working.
Turns green when either power is present from either Zone 1 or 2
Turns red when GPI Input 3 is asserted (contact closure to ground)
There are LED indicators on the Resource Module and the Power Supply Modules
Status LEDs indicate power supply status, resource module usage, and link light indicators for
Ethernet communication ports.
Alarm LEDs indicate user defined alarm conditions.
LED indicators reflect the status of subsystems inside the frame. The indicators for each power supply provide information on each voltage rail and the power supply’s fan. The indicators from each resource module provide status information of the frame’s resource module. These indicators are lit green when the system is functioning properly and red if a failure condition exists.
Failsafe Upgrade
Should the PX-ALARM module get corrupted and the Platinum IP3 Controller cannot update the firmware:
Press and hold the Fail Safe A and Fail Safe D for 3 seconds.
Use a paper clip to Press the button on the back of the Alarm module.
Use the Platinum IP3 Controller to update the firmware on the PX-ALARM module.
Power Consumption
Table 23: PX-ALARM Power Consumption
24V Power Rail
5V Power Rail
Total per Module
PX-ALARM-ATDM
2W
0.35W
2.35W
PX-ALARM-DATA
(No Expansion)
0.35W
0.35W
0.7W
PX-ALARM-DATA
(Expansion)
6W
0.4W
6.4W
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 64
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Output Monitoring Modules
Output Monitoring Modules
PX-HSRAEC-OM Output Monitoring Module
The PX-HSRAEC-OM is a 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI output monitoring module for the IP3 Frame. The module is designed to provide an output interface to monitor an output stream or preview an input stream as selected by the control system.
The PX-HSRAEC-OM is a dual slot card and it occupies slots 6 and 7 at the rear of the IP3 Frame.
For Video, there are 8 HD-BNC connectors at the outside edge of the module, 4 inputs and 4 outputs
Table 24: Video Connectors
Inputs
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
Outputs
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
7
7
Slot
6
6
Note: The Audio connectors though present are not currently used or functional.
The module can be used in three different ways:
The PX-HSRAEC-OM can receive a copy of the signal being sent to a particular router output
The PX-HSRAEC-OM can monitor any of the router inputs in the frame
The PX-HSRAEC-OM can also be used in an "external routing mode" where a physical cable is connected from the PX-HSRAEC-OM input port to an external source (destination or other test equipment).
Notes
PX-HSRAEC-OM modules have 2 monitor ports per slot
Slot 6 has video OUT1, OUT2
Slot 7 has Video OUT3, OUT4.
Each PX-HSRAEC-OM module can only monitor one output at a time from an output card on the same router
When routing external sources to monitor output, routing for external Inputs 1-4 is fixed. You can only route as follows:
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 65
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Slot 6
IN 1
IN 2
OUT 1
OUT 2
Slot 7
IN 3
IN 4
OUT 3
OUT 4
Any cross routing (for example Input 1 to Output 2) is locked.
Output Monitoring Modules
Table 25: PX-HSRAEC-OM Video Specifications
Items
Number of External Inputs
Number of Outputs
Coaxial Connector
Impedance
Signal Type
Nominal internal input amplitude
External input amplitude
Max. input cable length (1694A)
Reclocking
Return Loss
Output Jitter
Output Amplitude
DC offset
Rise/Fall times
Overshoot
Specification
4
4
HD-BNC
75 ohms
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE
344M, DVB-ASI, 3Mb/s to 3Gb/s
800mVp-p +/- 10%
800mVp-p +/- 10%
Up to 150m for 3Gbps
Up to 200m for 1.5Gbps
Up to 400m for 270Mbps
Automatic for data rates defined by SMPTE
424/259/292/344, DVB-ASI.
Bypass for all nonstandard rates
15dB up to 1.5GHz
10dB from 1.5GHz to 3GHz
< .2UI @ frequency tested
800mVp-p ± 10%
0V ± 0.5V
400ps – 1500ps for 270Mbps
< 270pS for 1.5Gbps
< 135pS for 3Gbps
< 10% of amplitude
Table 26: PX-HSRAEC-OM LED Indicators
LED Indicator
EXT IN 1
EXT IN 2
EXT IN 3
EXT IN 4
POWER
CTRL
Function
Signal Presence
Signal Presence
Signal Presence
Signal Presence
Power Supply Indicator
Active Control
Description
Active signal on this input (green)
Active signal on this input (green)
Active signal on this input (green)
Active signal on this input (green)
+24V power rails are operational
Initializes red
Turns green when the FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the card
Flashes amber if there is an alarm condition on this card
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 66
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules
Controllable Parameters
The PX-HSRAEC-OM module can be controlled via the Controller and is displayed in the Control Cards category. When you access a module (by clicking on it in the list of modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of modules (of that type) in the frame is also displayed on the left.
Parameters
General
Module
SDI In
Audio
Name
Module Status
Power Good
Sync Select
Signal Presence
(Table Parameter)
AES Input Present
(Table Parameter)
TDM RX Input Present
(Table Parameter)
TDM RX CRC Error Clear
(Table Parameter)
Audio Reference Selects AES reference input for source
DARS Input Present
Description
Displays current status of the module
Informs the user if board is experiencing any power issues
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
(Note: Actual signals are not synchronized to the reference. This parameter only affects switch timing)
RW
Type Options
RO
RO
Module Ready
Firmware Upgrade Required
Module Power Failure
Module Over Temperature
Yes
No
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Indicates presence of SDI or ASI signal. ASI signals will automatically bypass all processing stages.
RO
Yes
No
RW
RW
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Yes
No
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 67
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G)
Video Crosspoint Module (PX-
576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G)
The PX-576x1024-3G Video Crosspoint Module is the core switching matrix that enables 576x1024 switching within a single Platinum IP3 28 RU frame. The PX-288-512-3G Video Crosspoint Module enables 288x512 switching within a single 15 RU frame.
You can switch any of the 288/576 input signals to any of the 512/1024 outputs based on commands from the system control. The module supports AES, SDI (up to 3 Gb/s), and other serial digital signals.
The Video Crosspoint module also reports on current Crosspoint configuration status.
Figure 24: PX-576x1024-3G Video Crosspoint Module (for 28 RU)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 68
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G)
Figure 25: PX-288x512-3G Video Crosspoint Module (for 15 RU)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 69
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G)
28 RU Video Crosspoint Module Location in the Frame
The Platinum IP3 28 RU frame includes two slots for Video Crosspoint modules. The First slot holds the
Primary Video Crosspoint Module. The second slot holds an optional Secondary module, which shadows all operations of the active module, so as to allow it to become active in case the primary module is
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 70
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G) removed or halted due to error. The shadow module’s outputs are disabled until it becomes active, but otherwise performs all operations in parallel with the primary crosspoint module.
After the initial setup as Primary and Secondary, it's important to think of the Crosspoint modules using the Active and Standby notion, because those states define the Module that is currently functioning and the one backing it up. The Active Module is not necessarily the Primary one; rather, it is the one (could be Primary or Secondary) that took over in the last failover situation (and there may be several such failover situations over a period of time).
Extracting the Video Crosspoint from the 28 RU Frame
1. On the lower extractor, press the back side of the locking pin while pushing the extractor in.
2. After the extractor releases, pull it down.
3. On the upper extractor, press the back side of the locking pin while pushing the extractor in.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 71
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
4. After the extractor releases, pull it down.
Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G)
5. While holding back the Fan Module, grasp the upper and lower extractors and pull outward.
6. With the extractor handles horizontal, begin sliding the crosspoint module out.
7. Gently remove the Crosspoint Module ensuring that you support it from the middle rather than the front of the module.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 72
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G)
Putting the Video Crosspoint back into the 28 RU Frame
Table 27: Putting the Video Crosspoint Module back into the Frame
When you need to put the
Video Crosspoint Module back into the Frame, note the notch at the bottom that the card should slide into.
Also note the notch at the top.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 73
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G)
15 RU Video Crosspoint Module Location in the Frame
Video Crosspoint 1
(located behind fan module)
Video Crosspoint 2
(located behind fan module, beside Crosspoint #1)
The Platinum IP3 15 RU frame includes two slots for Video Crosspoint modules. The First slot holds the
Primary Video Crosspoint Module. The second slot holds an optional Secondary module.
The procedure to insert/extract a 15 RU Video Crosspoint is similar to the process for the 28 RU, with some minor differences.
The 15 RU Video Crosspoint Module is similar to the 28 RU one, but only half of the module is populated, and connectors are present only on that side. In a 15 RU frame, the crosspoint modules go in side by side, unlike the 28 RU frame where they go in one above the other. When inserting the 15 RU
Crosspoint Module into the frame, looking at the frame from the front, the module in the right slot goes in with the connectors on top, and the module in the left slot goes in with the connectors on the bottom. Note that you may encounter some resistance on the top of the module (for the one on the right) and the bottom of the module (for the one on the left) when pushing it into the frame.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 74
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G)
Video Crosspoint Module Parameters
The Video Crosspoint Module can be accessed and controlled via the web-based Platinum IP3 Controller.
Access the Module in the Crosspoint Cards section in the list of Modules, and click Open Module.
Table 28: Video Crosspoint Module Parameters
Name
Module Status
Enable Power
Board Temperature (1-2)
(Table Parameter)
Temperature Alarm
Description
Displays current status of module.
This parameter is used to turn the power to the board back on if the board had shut down due to over heating.
Type Options
RO
RW
Module Ready
Firmware Upgrade Required
Module Power Failure
Module Over Temperature
No
Yes
Board Temperature in degrees
Celsius.
Indicates if there is a temperature alarm on this board.
RO
RO
-40 ~ +140 deg C
Yes
No
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 75
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G)
You can also access the Video Crosspoint section in the Frame Parameters from where you can view status on the Active and Redundant Crosspoint in a frame, as well as set the Active Crosspoint. See
Video Crosspoint (on page 94).
LED Indicators on Video Crosspoint Module
The following system indicator LEDs are present on the front edge of the PX-576x1024-3G (for 28 RU) and PX-288x512-3G (for 15 RU) modules:
Table 29: Module System LEDs
LED
DESCRIPTION
POWER Power Supply indicator
Green When lit, this indicates that 24V is enabled on this board.
ACT CTRL
ACT XPT
Active Control
Red Initializing
Solid Green FPGA has configured and the Resource Module (PX-RES) is communicating with the card
Flashing Green Alarm condition on the card
Active Crosspoint
Yellow When lit, this indicates that this is the Active Crosspoint
Figure 26: LEDs on the PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G Video Crosspoint Module
Note: These LEDs are not directly visible on the Video Crosspoint when it is in normal operation since the Front Fan module is in front of the Video Crosspoint. The ACT XPT (Active Crosspoint) LED on the
Front Fan module indicates which Video Crosspoint is the Active Crosspoint. The ACT XPT LED will be off on the Front Fan module in front of the Standby Crosspoint.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 76
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G/PX-288x512-3G)
Fuses on the Video Crosspoint Module
Table 30: Fuses on the Video Crosspoint Module
Fuse Name Fuse Type Fuse Rating
FC5 Slowblow 750 mA
Power Consumption
Table 31: PX-576x1024-3G Power Consumption
24V Power Rail
5V Power Rail
236W
0.1W
Total Power
Modules in Frame
236.1W
2 (Primary and Secondary)
Table 32: PX-288x512-3G Power Consumption
24V Power Rail
5V Power Rail
Total Power
110W
0.1W
110.1W
Modules in Frame 2 (Primary and Secondary)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Part Number
127-100004Q00
June 2016 | Page 77
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
The PX-ATDM64-X28 Audio TDM Crosspoint (ATDM) module routes/switches audio signals from Input modules to Output modules, via a proprietary time-division multiplexed (TDM) transport scheme.
The Audio TDM Crosspoint module supports different types of audio transitions when switching from one audio source to another. Transition types such as Quiet switching, V-fade, fade-cut, cut-fade and synchronous switching. The cut associated with the fade-cut and cut-fade transitions are minimum duration fades to eliminate audible switching artifacts. It also allows for certain audio effects for a given destination.
Platinum and Platinum IP3 Routers support all types of audio including Dolby E and AC3. Since audio processing such as quiet switching and gain controls can cause data corruption with non-PCM audio,
Platinum routers support a pass-through mode for these non-PCM sources.
When using the Mux/Demux modules within the router, the audio packets are analyzed when they are demultiplexed. When the system identifies a non-PCM audio source, all processing functionality is disabled. This allows the non-PCM audio data to pass through the router without being corrupted.
The quiet switch capability of the ATDM module is active by default. Since the quiet switch capability can cause corruption for non-PCM audio at the switchpoint, the capability can be turned off for each output of the router using the Controller GUI.
When incoming audio is embedded within a video source, that audio is routed through the Video
(wideband) crosspoint without any processing. The embedded audio, and all ancillary data, is presented at the output exactly as it entered the router.
Figure 27: PX-ATDM64-X28 Audio Crosspoint Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 78
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-
X28) Location in the IP3 Frame
Audio TDM
Crosspoint 1 & 2
Modules
Figure 28: Audio TDM Crosspoint Module in a 28 RU Platinum IP3 frame
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 79
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
Audio TDM
Crosspoint 1 & 2
Modules
Figure 29: Audio TDM Crosspoint Module in a 15 RU Platinum IP3 frame
The Platinum IP3 frame includes two slots for Audio TDM Crosspoint modules, for a Primary and
Secondary Audio TDM Crosspoint Module. The Secondary module shadows all operations of the Primary module, so as to allow it to become active in case the Primary module is removed or halted due to error.
The shadow module sets its outputs to a high-impedance state until it becomes active, but otherwise performs all operations in parallel with the primary crosspoint module.
After the initial setup as Primary and Secondary, it's important to think of the ATDM modules using the
Active and Standby notion, because those states define the Module that is currently functioning and the one backing it up. The Active Module is not necessarily the Primary one; rather, it is the one (could be
Primary or Secondary) that took over in the last failover situation (and there may be several such failover situations over a period of time).
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 80
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Fuses on the PX-ATDM64-X28
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
Figure 30: Fuses on the PX-ATDM64-X28
Table 33: PX-ATDM64-X28 Fuses
Fuse Name Fuse Type Fuse Rating
PSF1 Slowblow 4 Amps
FC1 Slowblow 0.75 Amps
Present on
24V power rail
5V power rail
Part Number
127-100006Q00
127-100004Q00
DIP Switches on the PX-ATDM64-X28
DIP switch SWC2 switch 1, puts the Freescale Kinetis processor into Failsafe mode. To enable Failsafe, move SWC2 switch 1 to the ON position.
After you put the board into Failsafe mode, push the Reset button, SWC1, or power cycle the board by unplugging/plugging the board from the frame. Use the Controller's GUI to upgrade the application.
The following figure shows switch 1,2,3 and 4 in the OFF position. This is the setting that should be used for normal operation. Make sure the jumpers are restored to this position after performing a failsafe upgrade. Switch 2, 3 and 4 are reserved for future use.
Figure 31: DIP Switches on the PX-ATDM64-X28 Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 81
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
Fans on the Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Figure 32: Fans on the PX-ATDM64-X28
Table 34: PX-ATDM64-X28 Fan Components
Fan Component Part Number
Fan Blower 131-100006Q00
Fan Mounting Screws (4-40 3/16) 4-40X3/16 PH_Q
Fan Connector P9
Fan Connector P12
Instructions to Replace the Fan Blowers
Using needle-nosed pliers, carefully lift the Fan Connector off the board, taking care not to twist or bend it. Carefully remove the clip that the wire runs through.
1. Remove the wire than runs through the clip.
2. Remove the 2 Phillips mounting screws and gently lift the fan blower off the board.
3. Replace the Fan blower.
4. Attach the Fan Connector and wires.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 82
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Sync References
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
The ATDM module requires a PT-SYNC module to be installed in the frame for distribution of an internal sync signal, which uses up the SYNC4 distribution path.
SYNC1 and SYNC2 are used for connecting Video References.
PX-ATDM64-X28 Block Diagram
Figure 33: PX-ATDM64-X28 Block Diagram
Note that in case of a 15 RU frame, Slots 1-32 apply both on the Input and the Output side. For a 28 RU frame, 64 slots apply on both sides.
Audio from each Input slot is routed to both ATDM Crosspoints and Outputs from the ATDM Crosspoints are routed to each Output Slot. Both ATDM Crosspoint receive and process audio signals simultaneously.
Functionality
The Audio TDM Crosspoint Module provides the following functionality:
16/20/24 bit Audio Processing
The Audio TDM architecture supports processing of 16-bit, 20-bit, and 24-bit audio samples. Bits per sample are automatically detected by the TDM architecture
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 83
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Transitions
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
When switching between 2 audio signals, transitions such as V-Fade, Fade Cut, Cut Fade, and
Synchronous are supported. Transition type and duration are assigned on a per-output basis.
Quiet Switching
Quiet switching between two audio signals is supported as a predefined transition type. Quiet switching is implemented as a v-fade of two signals with minimum duration.
Synchronous Switching
AES streams are switched synchronously, at the AES frame boundary, with respect to a DARS.
Asynchronous Signals
Asynchronous inputs are re-sampled to a common reference frequency to avoid periodic adding/dropping of samples.
Level Adjustment
TDM Input/Output Modules support audio level adjustment from -30dBFS to +3dBFS. From -30dBFS to
0, adjustments will occur in 0.5dBFS increments and adjust in 0.33dBFS increments from 0 to +3dBFS.
Sample Rate Conversion (SRC)
The Audio TDM Crosspoint does not Sample Rate Convert (SRC) the audio signals. SRC is done on the
Input Audio TDM modules. Audio sampled at 32 kHz to 96 kHz can be Sample Rate Converted to 48 kHz and locked to the Digital Audio Reference Signals (DARS) connected to the Platinum IP3 frame.
Tone Generator
Audio TDM Input/Output Modules can generate valid AES silence, 500Hz tone, and 1KHz tone.
Polarity Reversal
Audio TDM Input/Output Modules provide a means to correct inverted audio polarity due to incorrect wiring in the analog domain.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 84
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Channels Swapping and Summing
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
Audio TDM Input/Output Modules provide the ability to exchange Left for Right or vice versa of an AES stereo pair. They also provide the ability to average two stereo pairs into a single mono channel.
Redundancy
There are 2 slots in the Platinum IP3 frame for Audio TDM Crosspoint Modules, for the primary and secondary modules. The redundant module becomes active within one video frame of an error occurring or with removal of the active board.
The ATDM modules, in conjunction with the Resource Module (PX-RES), determine which slot contains the Active module. The modules report their current status (active or standby) to the control system.
Appropriate watchdog circuitry on the module and/or status monitoring on the Resource Module will monitor the status of the active module. It is not necessary to remove the active module to cause the standby module to become active.
Frame Expansion
In case of a 28 RU Platinum IP3 frame, the Audio TDM architecture enables interconnectivity between two Platinum IP3 frames, expanding to matrix sizes up to 16384x16384, including four AES output monitoring outputs per frame. Each crosspoint sends its inputs to the second frame via Densishield cables. The Audio TDM Crosspoints in the top slots in each frame must be connected to each other using
Densishield cable. The Crosspoints in the bottom slots must also be connected together.
LED Indicators
The following indicator LEDs are present on the front edge of the PX-ATDM64-X28 module:
Table 35: Module System LEDs
LED
POWER
ACT CTRL
DESCRIPTION
Power Supply indicator
Green When lit, this indicates that 24V is enabled on this board.
Active Control
Red Initializing
Solid Green
Flashing Green
FPGA has configured and the Resource Module (PX-RES) is communicating with the card
Alarm condition on the card
ACT XPT
PRIMARY
Active Crosspoint
Yellow
Green
When lit, this indicates that this is the Main Crosspoint
When lit, this indicates the Audio TDM Crosspoint is driving audio outputs.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 85
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
Figure 34: LEDs on the PX_ATDM64_X28 Crosspoint Module
Below the POWER LED are three other LEDS:
5V_MI
3.3VL_PIPE
3V_MCU
All of these LEDs should be Green when the frame is powered up. If any one of them is not lit, it indicates a power problem on the board or the frame. Check Fuse FC1 (See FC1) to see if it’s open.
Hardware Connections for Audio Expansion
To physically enable audio expansion, connect DensiShield cables across the PX-ATDM64-X28 modules in both frames, setting up a bi-directional connection between the TDM modules, so audio can be routed from one frame to another.
For example, to route audio across 2 frames (presuming an active and redundant TDM Crosspoint module in each):
1. Frame 1, TDM XPT OUT1 > Frame 2, TDM XPT IN1
Connect a Densishield cable from the OUT1 of the top PX-ATDM64-X28 module in Frame 1 to the
IN1 of the top PX-ATDM64-X28 module in Frame 2
2. Frame 2, TDM XPT OUT1 > Frame 1, TDM XPT IN1
Connect a Densishield cable from the OUT1 of the top PX-ATDM64-X28 module in Frame 2 to the
IN1 of the top PX-ATDM64-X28 module in Frame 1
3. Frame 1, TDM XPT OUT2 > Frame 2, TDM XPT IN2
Connect a Densishield cable from the OUT2 of the bottom PX-ATDM64-X28 module in Frame 1 to the IN2 of the bottom PX-ATDM64-X28 module in Frame 2
4. Frame 2, TDM XPT OUT2 > Frame 1, TDM XPT IN2
Connect a Densishield cable from the OUT2 of the bottom PX-ATDM64-X28 module in Frame 2 to the IN2 of the bottom PX-ATDM64-X28 module in Frame 1
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 86
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
FRAME 1
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
FRAME 2
PX-ALARM-ATDM Module
v u x w
PX-ALARM-ATDM Module
u v w x
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 87
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
A bank of LEDs on the top of the PX-ATDM64-X28 module serve as a physical indicator of connection status. LEDs D9, D6, D7 indicate the presence, Frame Lock and Phase lock of incoming ATDM signals. If both frames are properly locked to the same Sync and DARS signals and if the DensiShield cable is properly connected, all three LEDs will be on.
The web interface also indicates the connection status. See Audio Expansion Connection Status in the
Audio Expansion Connection Status in the Web UI
Open the PX-ATDM64-X28 Audio TDM Crosspoint Module from the list of modules by clicking the Open
Module button against it.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 88
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
In the parameters displayed, the Frame Expansion section displays a parameter Expansion Link Status.
This shows as "Link Present" if the connections have been properly made.
PX-ATDM64-X28 Parameters
Category
Module > Fans
Module
Name
Fan Alarm
(Table Parameter)
Fan Running
(Table Parameter)
Power Status
Description
Indicates if Fan Alarm has been set
Indicates whether fans are running
Indicates power status.
FPGA
PCB Rev
Upgrade from USB
Upgrade State
FPGA Rev
FPGA Temp
FPGA Temp Alarm
The PCB Revision.
Note: 1-3 are Prototype revisions. 4 is the first released revision.
Enabling or Disabling USB
Upgrades
The state of any current upgrades
The FPGA Revision
The FPGA Temperature
FPGA Temperature Alarm
RO
RO
RO
Type Options
RO
RO
Yes
No
Yes
No
RO
RO
RW
Good
Bad
1
2
3
4
Yes
No
No activity
<String>
<String>
Yes
No
Firmware Upgrade
Follow this procedure to upgrade firmware on the PX-ATDM64-X28:
1. Go to the Firmware Foundry, Firmware Repository tab
2. Click the Add Package button
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 89
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
3. Browse and select the firmware upgrade zip and click Open
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
4. Click OK to the the message confirming the firmware will be transferred to the Controller's
Repository
5. Once the firmware has been loaded to the repository, go to the IO Module tab
6. Expand details for the frame that contains your module
7. Locate the PX-ATDM64-x28 module under Crosspoint Cards and select it
8. Click the Select Firmware button at the top
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 90
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX-ATDM64-X28)
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module
9. In the Select Firmware dialog, select the version of the firmware to upgrade the module with. Click
OK.
Power Consumption
Table 36: PX-ATDM64-X28 Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 55W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.8W
55.8W
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 91
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Frame Parameters
Frame Parameters
Frame specific components and their parameters can be viewed by clicking the Open Frame link.
Figure 35: Open Frame option to access Frame parameters
The following parameters provide a control interface to the IP3 frame. These parameters are divided into different menu groups, all listed below the main Frame:
Frame Parameters (on page 92 )
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 92
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Frame
The Frame section provides the following parameters:
Table 37: Frame parameters
Parameter
Frame Type
Frame ID
Ambient Temperature
Type Description/Options
RO
RO
RO
IP3 28 RU
IP3 15 RU
A unique 6-byte frame identifier
The Frame temperature in degrees Celsius
Frame Parameters
Figure 36: Frame Parameters
PX-RES
The PX-RES section provides the following parameters:
Table 38: PX-RES parameters
Parameter
PX-RES 1 Serial #
PX-RES 2 Serial #
PX-RES 1
Type Description/Options
RO
RO
RO
<String>
Not Present
<String>
Not Present
Active
Standby
Not Present
Initializing
Configuring
Failsafe
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 93
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
PX-RES 2
Select Active PX-RES
PX-RES Firmware Version
Type Description/Options
RO
RW
Active
Standby
Not Present
Initializing
Configuring
Failsafe
PX-RES1
PX-RES2
RO A string showing the current firmware version of the active
PX-RES
Frame Parameters
PX-RES Alternate Version RO A string showing the firmware version on the alternate bank of the active PX-RES
Figure 37: PX-RES Parameters
Video Crosspoint
The Video Crosspoint section provides the following parameters:
Table 39: Video Crosspoint parameters
Parameter
Video Crosspoint 1
Video Crosspoint 2
Type Description/Options
RO
RO
Active
Standby
Not Present
Failed
Active
Standby
Not Present
Failed
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 94
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Select Active Video Crosspoint
Type Description/Options
RW
Module1
Module2
Frame Parameters
Figure 38: Video Crosspoint Parameters
TDM Crosspoint
The TDM Crosspoint section provides the following parameters:
Table 40: TDM Crosspoint parameters
Parameter
TDM Crosspoint 1
TDM Crosspoint 2
Select Active TDM Crosspoint
Type Description/Options
RO
RO
RW
Active
Standby
Not Present
Failed
Active
Standby
Not Present
Failed
Module1
Module2
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 95
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Parameters
Figure 39: TDM Crosspoint Parameters
Sync
The Sync section provides the following parameters:
Table 41: Sync Parameters
Parameter
Sync Mode
(Table Parameter)
Output Standard
(RW only when Sync Mode (Table
Parameter) is set to Standard)
(Table Parameter)
Type Description/Options
RW Auto, Standard, Advanced
RW
None
525/60
525/59.94
625/50
1920x1080/60I
1920x1080/59.94I
1920x1080/50I
1920x1080/30P
1920x1080/29.97P
1920x1080/25P
1920x1080/24P
1920x1080/24PsF
1920x1080/23.97P
1920x1080/23.97PsF
1280x720/60P
1280x720/59.94P
1280x720/50P
1920x1080/60P
1920x1080/59.94P
1920x1080/50P
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 96
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Sync Pulse Delay
(available only when Sync Mode
(Table Parameter) is set to
Advanced)
(Table Parameter)
Detected Sync
(Table Parameter)
Sync Module 1
Sync Module 2
Select Active Sync Module
Sync 3 - Source Select
Sync 4 - Source Select
Type Description/Options
RW 0 to 65535
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
Displays the current detected reference standard.
Active, Standby, Not Present
Active, Standby, Not Present
Module1
Module2
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 4
Frame Parameters
Figure 40: Sync Parameters
Sync Notes
The Sync Mode parameter (set to Auto by default) allows for configuration of switching point settings. In Auto mode, the output switches relative to the detected sync reference assigned to the module.
If Sync Mode is set to Standard, the Output Standard parameter can be used to specify the video standard to use as the switching point timing reference relative to the sync reference signal detected on the selected Sync input (Sync 1 - 4)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 97
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Parameters
If Sync Mode is set to Advanced, the Sync Pulse Delay parameter can be used to specify where the output switching point is relative to the reference signal. The delay is in units of microseconds.
Power Supplies
The Power Supplies section provides the following parameters:
Table 42: Power Supplies parameters
Parameter
Top Shelf 5V Power
(28 RU only)
5V Power
(15 RU only)
Bottom Shelf 5V Power
(28 RU only)
Zone 1 24V Power
Zone 2 24V Power
Zone 3 24V Power
(28 RU only)
Zone 4 24V Power
(28 RU only)
Type Description/Options
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Present
Failed
Present
Failed
Present
Failed
Present
Failed
Present
Failed
Present
Failed
Present
Failed
Figure 41: Power Supplies Parameters for a 28 RU Frame
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 98
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Ethernet Ports
The Ethernet Ports section provides the following parameters:
Table 43: Ethernet Ports Parameters
Parameter Type Description/Options
MAC Address 1 RO MAC Address of the 1st Ethernet Port on the active PX-RES
Port 1 if PX-RES on the top slot is active
Port 3 if PX-RES on the bottom slot is active
Frame Parameters
IP Address 1
IP Mask 1
Gateway Address 1
Save Ethernet 1
MAC Address 2
IP Address 2
IP Mask 2
Gateway Address 2
Save Ethernet 2
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
RW
RW
RW
IP address string for the back panel Ethernet connectors 1 and 3
IP mask string for the back panel Ethernet connectors 1 and 3
Gateway Address string
No
Yes
MAC Address of the 2nd Ethernet Port on the active PX-
RES
Port 2 if PX-RES on the top slot is active
Port 4 if PX-RES on the bottom slot is active
IP address string for the back panel Ethernet connectors 2 and 4
IP mask string for the back panel Ethernet connectors 2 and 4
Gateway Address string
No
Yes
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 99
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Serial Ports
The Serial Ports section provides the following parameters:
Table 44: Serial Ports parameters
Parameter
Port (1-2) Mode
Port (1-2) Baud Rate
Port (1-2) Stop Bit
Port (1-2) Parity
Save Serial (1-2)
Type Description/Options
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RS 232
RS 422
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
14400
19200
38400
57600
115200
1
2
None
Odd
Even
No
Yes
Frame Parameters
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 100
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Input Modules (PX-IB)
PX-IB Input Module General Overview
The PX-IB is a generic Video Input Module designed for the Platinum IP3 Frame. It supports signals up to
3 Gbps.
The PX-IB Input Module accepts digital video signals, equalizes and retimes data streams, detects standards and formats, and distributes signals to the MI backplane to be switched by the crosspoint matrix. PX-IB input modules are hot-swappable.
The PX-IB accepts an input data stream for each of the nine channels. Cable losses are automatically compensated for, if the cable length is within the maximum length limitation. The maximum cable length is a system specification, not solely dependent on the input card. It is measured by bit error limitation (not jitter).
Figure 42: PX-IB Generic Input Module
PX-IB Input Options
The PX-IB is designed in front module plus back module structure. A single common front module (FM) combines with different back modules to provide several IO variations.
The PX-IB Input Module combines with the following back modules:
PX-HSR9C-IBG Input Module (on page 118 )
PX-HSR9O-IBG Input Module (on page 118)
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Input Module (on page 119)
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Input Module (on page 120)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 101
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
The PX-IB module accepts the following inputs:
Table 45: PX-IB Input Options
Back Module Type Number of Inputs
HD-BNC
SFP (optical)
Nine Electrical Inputs
Nine Optical Inputs
Input Modules (PX-IB)
PX-IB Expansion
The PX-IB module can also be used with specific back modules intended for expansion. See:
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Input Module (on page 119 )
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Input Module (on page 120)
Inserting Input Modules into the Platinum IP3 frame
Each Input Module may be inserted into, or extracted from, a Platinum IP3 frame while the frame is powered and functioning. The system Controller will recognize the addition or removal of an Input
Module from any of the Input Module slots, and will update the change automatically.
When the Controller recognizes the addition of an Input Module, it will allow the user to control the additional inputs to the matrix.
When inserted into the Platinum IP3 frame, each Input Module mates with a passive connector assembly (back module), mounted in the rear of the frame. This assembly allows a high integrity interconnect between the input cables and the input module, without requiring any active components.
Frames that are not fully populated with input modules when shipped from the factory contain blank covers over the non-populated slots. If an Input Module is added to the frame at a future time, the blank cover must be replaced with the corresponding back module.
Failsafe Mode
To put an Input Module in Failsafe Mode:
1. Unplug the board
2. Set the Failsafe jumper.
3. Wait 10 seconds
4. Insert the board again
The above procedure applies to the following Input Modules
PX-HSR9C-IBG Input Module (on page 118 )
PX-HSR9O-IBG Input Module (on page 118)
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Input Module (on page 119)
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Input Module (on page 120)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 102
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Signal Presence and LEDs
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Each of the nine input channels on the Input Module provides signal presence reporting via card edge
LEDs and the control software. Both have the ability to be disabled or enabled through the control software, along with a user-selectable hysteresis period.
Module LEDs
See Module LEDs (on page 276).
System LEDs
There are three system indicator LEDs on the front edge of the module:
Table 46: Module System LEDs
LED DESCRIPTION
INPUT 1-9 Signal Presence
POWER
ACT CTRL
Green
Slow Flash
Signal Present
Valid Signal present but not locked
Solid On
Power Supply indicator
Valid Signal present and locked
+24V power rails are operational Green
Active Control
Red
Solid Green
Initializing
FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the card
ACT IN
Flashing Green
Active Input Warning
Yellow
Alarm condition on the card
Input on card being used by one or more outputs
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 103
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Note: PX-IB can lock to 270Mbps, 1.5Gbps and 3Gbps video SDI signals.
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Figure 43: LEDs on PX-IB Input Module
Controllable Parameters
For Input Modules, the Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available parameters, arranged into groupings.
Parameter Notes
Parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the Platinum IP3 Controller.
Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are "read-only."
Parameters marked Modules with SFPs Only apply only to optical modules such as PX-HSR9O-IBG
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 104
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(Module) Root Level Parameters
Input Modules (PX-IB)
The following parameters are displayed at the root level (when you click the Module) in the parameter menu list:
Table 47: Module Parameters
Name Description
Software Version Software version of micro controller
Sync Select
Temperature
Control FPGA Version
Module Status
SFP Type
(For Modules with SFPs only)
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
(Note: Actual signals are not synchronized to the reference. This parameter only affects control timing)
RW
Monitor module temperature
Unit: deg C
RO
Version of FPGA RO
Reports current module status RO
Reports the type of SFP
Type Options
RO <String>
RO
Sync 1 (Default)
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
-40 ~ +140 deg C
<String>
Module Ready
Firmware Upgrade
Required
Module Over
Temperature
Invalid SFP
OP+SFP+TT+13+13
OP+SFP+TT+27+29
OP+SFP+TT+31+33
OP+SFP+TT+35+37
OP+SFP+TT+39+41
OP+SFP+TT+43+45
OP+SFP+TT+47+49
OP+SFP+TT+51+53
OP+SFP+TT+55+57
OP+SFP+TT+59+61
NO SFP
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 105
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Input Parameters
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Input Parameters are accessed by clicking the Inputs option below the Module in the parameter menu list.
The following parameters are displayed:
Table 48: Input Parameters
Name
Signal Presence
Description
Reports presence or absence of valid signal
Type Options
RO
Yes
No
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 106
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Video Standard
EQ Bypass
Video Error
Reclocker Mode
Lock Detect
Description
Detects video standard
Sets the EQ mode
Detects video standard error in input signal based on the SMPTE 352M packet, if present, and the standard detected by the input card
Sets the reclock mode to automatic or bypass or to one of three manual fixed rates
RW
Type Options
RW
RO
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
1035i 60
1035i 59.94
1080i 60
1080i 59.94
1080i 50
1080psf 24
1080psf 23.98
1080p 30
1080p 29.97
1080p 25
1080p 24
1080p 23.98
720p 60
720p 59.94
1080p 60
1080p 59.94
1080p 50
1080i 50 295M
720p 50
720p 25
720p 24
720p 23.98
720p 30
720p 29.97
1080p 60 DL
1080p 59.94 DL
1080p 50 DL
EQ On
Bypass
Yes
No
N/A
Reports if data is relocked by reclocking stage
RO
Auto (Default)
3G
HD
SD
Bypass
Yes
No
Input Modules (PX-IB)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 107
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Rate Detect
Description
Detects data rate
Mute Mutes the output of the board
Input Optical Power
(Modules with SFPs only)
Reports input optical signal power level
Type Options
RO
RW
RO
Unknown
SD
HD
3G
Output Enabled
Output Muted
Too Low
-32 - 1 dBm
Too High
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Table 49: CRC&EDH Parameters
Name Description Type Options
EDH Presence
Input EDH Error
EDH package present in input SD signal
EDH error present in input SD signal
RO
RO
CRC/EDH Counter Control Enables or disables the CRC/EDH Error
Fields counter and the Video Error detector
RW
CRC/EDH Error Fields
CRC/EDH Error Clear
Shows CRC/EDH errors
Clear CRC/EDH error counter
RO
RW
Yes
No
N/A
Yes
No
N/A
Enable (Default)
Disable
0 ~ 65535
Yes
No (Default)
Table 50: Advanced Parameters
Name
Signal Input Range
EQ Power Save Mode
Description
In normal operation, input EQ is set to compensate cable loss where at the other end of the cable, the driver outputs
800mVpp.
If a passive splitter is present on the input side of the module, set this to Small
(400mVpp).
Puts equalizer into power save mode
Type Options
Normal (800mVpp)
Small (400mVpp)
RW
EQ Always On
Auto
EQ Always Off
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 108
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Specifications
Technical Specifications
Table 51: Input Module - Technical Specifications
Item
Input Connector
Impedance
Signal type
Maximum input level
Return loss (BNC, HD-BNC)
Equalization (BNC, HD-BNC)
Optical input sensitivity
Description
75 Ohm BNC per IEC 169-8
75 Ohm HD-BNC
LC optical
DensiShield
75 Ohms (BNC, HD-BNC)
100 Ohms differential (DensiShield)
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3Mb/s to 3.0Gb/s
880mV (BNC, HD-BNC)
Optical 0dBm typical (based on GO2927/2917)
> 15dB, up to 1.485GHz
> 10dB, 1.485GHz to 2.97GHz
Automatic
400m Belden 1694A for 270Mb/s data rate
200m Belden 1694A for 1.485Gb/s data rate
150m Belden 1694A for 2.97Gb/s data rate
-20dBm (based on OP+SFP+RR/OP+SFP+R)
Capacity
Table 52: Input Module - Capacity
Number of Inputs
From rear edge of module 9
Number of Outputs
To MI connector
To rear edge of module
18
9 (optional)
Input Modules (PX-IB)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 109
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Output Modules (PX-OB)
Output Modules (PX-OB)
PX-OB Output Module General Overview
The PX-OB is a generic, Video Output Module designed for the Platinum IP3 Frame.
PX-OB modules recondition SDI video received from crosspoint modules before distributing to various output interfaces - such as standard BNC coaxial cables, HD-BNC coaxial cables, and SFP optical fiber. PX-
OB output modules are hot-swappable.
Each PX-OB output module provides a maximum of16 output signal channels.Output modules accept 32 signals from the crosspoint matrix. Each output channel also contains an output monitoring path which feeds the output signal seen on any channel back to an optional rear-mounted output monitoring card.
Figure 44: PX-OB Generic Output Module
PX-OB Output Options
The PX-OB is designed in front module plus back module structure. A single common front module (FM) combines with different back modules to provide several IO variations.
The PX-OB Output Module combines with the following back modules:
PX-HSR16C-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR16O-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Output Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 110
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 53: PX-OB Output Options
Back Module Type
HD-BNC
Number of Outputs
Sixteen Electrical Outputs
SFP (optical) Sixteen Optical Outputs
Output Modules (PX-OB)
PX-OB Expansion
PX-OB also provides a router expansion (8 input channels) interface using DensiShield.
See PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG Output Module and PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Output Module.
Inserting Output Modules into the Platinum
IP3 frame
Each Output Module may be inserted into, or extracted from, a Platinum IP3 frame while the frame is powered and functioning. The system Controller will recognize the addition or removal of an Output
Module from any of the Output Module slots, and will update the change automatically. When the
Controller recognizes the addition of an Output Module, it allows the user to control the additional inputs to the matrix.
When inserted into the Platinum IP3 frame, each Output Module mates with a passive connector assembly (back module), mounted in the rear of the frame. This assembly allows a high integrity interconnect between the input cables and the input module, without requiring any active components.
Frames that are not fully populated with modules when shipped from the factory contain blank covers over the non-populated slots. If an Output Module is added to the frame at a future time, the blank cover must be replaced with the corresponding back module.
Note: Platinum IP3 modules can be damaged if they are plugged into the wrong back modules or wrong slot. Care should be exercised when plugging modules into the frame.
Failsafe Mode
To put an Output Module in Failsafe Mode:
1. Unplug the board
2. Set the Failsafe jumper.
3. Wait 10 seconds
4. Insert the board again
The above procedure applies to the following Output Modules
PX-HSR16C-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR16O-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Output Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 111
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Signal Presence and LEDs
Output Modules (PX-OB)
Each of the channels on the Output Module provide signal presence reporting via card edge LEDs and the control software. Both have the ability to be disabled or enabled through the control software.
Figure 45: System LEDs on PX-OB Output Module
System LEDs
There are 3 system indicator LEDs on the front edge of the module:
Table 54: Module System LEDs
LED
OUTPUT 1-16
DESCRIPTION
Signal Presence
POWER
ACT CTRL
Green
Power Supply indicator
Green
Active Control
Red
Solid Green
Signal Present
+24V power rails are operational
Initializing
FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the card
Flashing Green Alarm condition on the card
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 112
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
LED
ACT OUT
DESCRIPTION
Active Output Warning
Yellow Output on card being used by one or more outputs
Output Modules (PX-OB)
Module LEDs
See Module LEDs.
Controllable Parameters
For Output Modules, the Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available parameters, arranged into groupings.
Parameter Notes
Parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller.
Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are "read-only."
Parameters marked Expansion Modules Only apply only to expansion modules such as PX-
HSR8O2DS-OBG Output Module and PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG Output Module
Parameters marked Modules with SFPs Only apply only to optical modules such as PX-HSR16O-OBG
Output Module.
(Module) Root Level Parameters
The following parameters are displayed at the root level (when you click the Module) in the parameter menu list:
Table 55: Output Modules - Root Parameters
Name
Software Version
Description Type Options
Software version of micro controller RO <String>
Control FPGA Version Version of FPGA RO <String>
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 113
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
SFP Type
(Table Parameter)
(Modules with SFPs only)
Module Status
Sync Select
(Under Module)
Description
Reports the type of SFP
Reports current module stauts
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Output Modules (PX-OB)
Type Options
RO
RO
RW
Invalid SFP
OP+SFP+TT+13+13
OP+SFP+TT+27+29
OP+SFP+TT+31+33
OP+SFP+TT+35+37
OP+SFP+TT+39+41
OP+SFP+TT+43+45
OP+SFP+TT+47+49
OP+SFP+TT+51+53
OP+SFP+TT+55+57
OP+SFP+TT+59+61
NO SFP
Module Ready
Firmware Upgrade Required
Module Over Temperature
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Output Parameters
Output Parameters are accessed by clicking the Output option below the Module in the parameter menu list.
The following parameters are displayed:
Table 56: Output Parameters
Name
Reclocker Mode
Data Rate
Lock Detect
Autobypass
Description
Sets the reclock mode to automatic or bypass or to one of three manual fixed rates
Detects data rate
Reports if data is relocked by reclocking stage
Type Options
RW
RO
RO
RW
Auto (Default)
3G
HD
SD
Bypass
Unknown
SD
HD
3G
Yes
No
Yes
No
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 114
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Mute
Description
Mutes individual board outputs
Enforced Slew Rate Sets output slew rate in bypass mode
Type Options
RW
Output Enabled
Output Muted
RW
SD (Default)
HD
Table 57: Expand Parameters
Name
Expand Signal Present
(Expansion Modules only)
Exp Reclocker Mode
(Expansion Modules only)
Exp Data Rate
(Expansion Modules only)
Exp Lock Detect
(Expansion Modules only)
Exp Auto Bypass
(Expansion Modules only)
Description
Reports signal presence
Sets the reclock mode
Detects data rate
Reports if data is relocked by reclocking stage
Sets automatic reclocker bypass mode
Type Options
RO
Yes
No
RW
RO
RO
RW
Auto (Default)
3G
HD
SD
Bypass
Unknown
SD
HD
3G
Yes
No
Yes
No
Table 58: Optical Parameters
Name Description Type Options
Laser Enable
(Modules with SFPs only)
Laser Status
(Modules with SFPs only)
Wavelength
(Modules with SFPs only)
Enables or disables fiber optical output
Reports laser status
RW
RO
Reports wavelength of fiber optical output
RO
Auto
Enable
Disable
Enabled
Disabled
N/A
Normal
Failed
Output Modules (PX-OB)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 115
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Specifications
Technical Specifications
Table 59: Output Module - Technical Specifications
Item
Output Connector
Impedance
Description
75 Ohm BNC per IEC 169-8
75 Ohm HD-BNC
LC optical
DensiShield
75 Ohms (BNC, HD-BNC)
100 Ohms differential (DensiShield)
Signal type
Return loss (BNC, HD-BNC)
Amplitude
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3Mb/s to 3.0Gb/s
> 15dB, up to 1.485GHz
> 10dB, 1.485GHz to 2.97GHz
800mV +/- 10%
<10% Overshoot
DC Offset
0V +/- 0.5V
Rise Time
270Mb/s: 400-800pS
1.485Gb/s: < 135pS
2.97Gb/s: < 135pS
Fall Time
Jitter
270Mb/s: 400-800pS
1.485Gb/s: < 135pS
2.97Gb/s: < 135pS
270Mb/s, 1.485Gb/s: <0.2UI reclocked
2.97Gb/s: <0.3UI reclocked
Optical Output Power
-2 dBm (based on OP+SFP+TT+13+13)
Optical Output Extinction Ratio
7 dB (based on OP+SFP+TT+13+13)
Capacity
Table 60: PX-OB Output Module Capacity
Number of Inputs
From rear edge of module 8 (optional DensiShield inputs)
From MI connector 32 (16 main + 16 redundant)
Number of Outputs
To rear edge of module 16 (16 single ended or 16 differential or 8 single ended + 8 differential)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Digital Video Modules
June 2016 | Page 116
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Digital Video Modules
Digital Video Modules
The following Digital Video Input and Output Modules for the IP3 Frame are covered in this chapter:
Digital Video Back Module Options
Module Description Use With
DIGITAL VIDEO INPUT MODULES
PX-HSR9C-IBG Input Module (on page 118)
9 Channel Electrical Back Module with 9
HDBNC connectors.
PX-HSR9O-IBG Input Module (on page 118)
9 Channel Optical Back Module with 5 SFP connectors.
PX-IB Input Module
See Input Modules (PX-IB) (on
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Input Module (on page 119) 9 Channel Electrical Back Module with 9
HDBNC connectors and 1 Densishield port for expansion.
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Input Module (on page 120) 9 Channel Optical Back Module with 5 SFP
connectors and 1 Densishield port for expansion.
PX-HSR1C1D-IBG Input Module (on page 121) 9 Channel Electrical Back Module with 1
HDBNC connector and 1 Densishield port for expansion.
DIGITAL VIDEO OUTPUT MODULES
PX-HSR16C-OBG Output Module (on page
PX-HSR16O-OBG Output Module (on page
16 Channel Electrical Back Module with 16
HDBNC connectors.
16 Channel Optical Back Module with 8
SFP connectors.
PX-OB Output Module
See Output Modules (PX-OB)
(see "Input Modules (PX-IB)" on page 101)
PX-HSR8O2D-OBG Output Module (on page
16 Channel Optical Back Module with 4
SFP connectors and 2 DensiShield ports for Expansion.
PX-HSR8C2D-OBG Output Module (on page
16 Channel Electrical Back Module with 8
HDBNC connectors and 2 DensiShield ports for Expansion.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 117
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-HSR9C-IBG Input Module
Digital Video Modules
The PX-HSR9C-IBG is a 9 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Input Module with 9 HDBNC connectors.
Figure 46: PX-HSR9C-IBG Back Module
This Back Module interfaces with the PX-IB Input module to accept 9 electrical inputs.
See Input Modules (PX-IB) (on page 101) for details on the PX-IB Input module.
Power Consumption
Table 61: PX-HSR9C-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 10.7W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
11.13W
PX-HSR9O-IBG Input Module
The PX-HSR9O-IBG is a 9 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Input Module with 5 SFP connectors.
The PX-HSR9O-IBG has 5 dual channel SFP modules mounted on the metal back panel of the back module, each containing two channels. The second channel of the last connector is not currently used.
The OP+SFP+RR and OP+SFP+R accept fiber optical signals within wavelength range of 1260nm ~
1620nm.
Figure 47: PX-HSR9O-IBG
The Back Module interfaces with the PX-IB Input module to accept 9 optical inputs.
See Input Modules (PX-IB) (on page 101) for details on the PX-IB Input module.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 118
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Consumption
Table 62: PX-HSR9O-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 14W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
14.43W
Digital Video Modules
PX-HSR9C-IBG/PX-HSR9O-IBG Parametric Control
The PX-HSR9C-IBG/PX-HSR9O-IBG Module can be controlled via the Controller. When you access a PX-
HSR9C-IBG/PX-HSR9O-IBG module (by clicking on it in the list of Input Modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of PX-HSR9C-IBG/9O modules in the frame is also displayed on the left.
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Input Module
The PX-HSR9C1D-IBG is a 9 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Input Module with 9 HDBNC connectors and one DensiShield port for expansion.
Figure 48: PX-HSR9C1D-IBG
Via the DensiShield port, inputs received can be routed to another module in the same frame or another frame.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 119
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules
This Back Module interfaces with the PX-IB Input module to accept 9 electrical inputs.
See Input Modules (PX-IB) (on page 101) for details on the PX-IB Input module.
Power Consumption
Table 63: PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 13W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
13.43W
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Input Module
The PX-HSR9O1D-IBG is a 9 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Input Module with 5 SFP connectors.
Figure 49: PX-HSR9O1D-IBG
The PX-HSR9O-IBG has 5 dual channel SFP modules mounted on the metal back panel of the back module, each containing two channels. The first channel of the last connector is not currently used. The receivers accept fiber optical signals within wavelength range of X nm ~ X nm.
Via the DensiShield port, inputs received can be output/routed to another module in the same frame or another frame.
The Back Module interfaces with the PX-IB Input module to accept 9 optical inputs.
See Input Modules (PX-IB) (on page 101) for details on the PX-IB Input module.
Power Consumption
Table 64: PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 16.3W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
16.73W
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 120
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-HSR1C1D-IBG Input Module
Digital Video Modules
The PX-HSR1C1D-IBG is a 9 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Input Module with one HDBNC connector and one DensiShield port for expansion.
Figure 50: PX-HSR1C1D-IBG
Via the DensiShield port, you can receive up to 8 outputs from another module in the same frame or another frame. The HD-BNC connector lets you receive one electrical output.
This Back Module interfaces with the PX-IB Input module.
See Input Modules (PX-IB) (on page 101) for details on the PX-IB Input module.
Power Consumption
Table 65: PX-HSR1C1D-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail
5V Power Rail
Total Power
PX-HSR16C-OBG Output Module
The PX-HSR16C-OBG is a 16 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Output Module with 16 HDBNC connectors.
Figure 51: PX-HSR16C-OBG
This Back Module interfaces with the PX-OB Output module to output16 electrical outputs.
See Output Modules (PX-OB) (see "Input Modules (PX-IB)" on page 101) for details on the PX-OB Output
module.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 121
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Consumption
Table 66: PX-HSR16C-OBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 11.7W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
12.13W
Digital Video Modules
PX-HSR16O-OBG Output Module
The PX-HSR16O-OBG is a 16 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Output Module with 8 SFP connectors.
Figure 52: PX-HSR16O-OBG
The PX-HSR16O-OBG has 8 SFP modules mounted on the metal back panel of the back module, each containing two channels.
The PX-HSR16O-OBG interfaces with the PX-OB Output module to output up to 16 optical outputs. See
Output Modules (PX-OB) (see "Input Modules (PX-IB)" on page 101) for details on the PX-OB Output
module.
Power Consumption
Table 67: PX-HSR16O-OBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 21.9W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
22.33W
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 122
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules
PX-HSR16C-OBG/PX-HSR16O-OBG-IBG Parametric Control
The PX-HSR16C-OBG/PX-HSR16O-OBG Module can be controlled via the Controller. When you access a
PX-HSR16C-OBG/PX-HSR16O-OBG module (by clicking on it in the list of Output Modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of PX-HSR16C-OBG/PX-HSR16O-OBG modules in the frame is also displayed on the left.
PX-HSR8O2D-OBG Output Module
The PX-HSR8O2D-OBG is a 16 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Output Module.
Figure 53: PX-HSR8O2D-OBG
Figure 54: PX-HSR8O2D-OBG
The PX-HSR8O2D-OBG has 4 SFP connectors mounted on the metal back panel of the back module, each containing 2 channels.
There are 2 DensiShield ports on the module - one of them accepts up to 8 electrical inputs and the other can output op to 8 electrical outputs. The DensiShield ports are intended for expansion.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 123
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules
The PX-HSR8O2D-OBG interfaces with the PX-OB Output Module to output up to 16 outputs (8 optical
and 8 optical/electrical). See Output Modules (PX-OB) (see "Input Modules (PX-IB)" on page 101) for
details on the PX-OB Output module.
Power Consumption
Table 68: PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 18W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
18.43W
PX-HSR8C2D-OBG Output Module
The PX-HSR8C2D-OBG is a 16 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Output Module.
Figure 55: PX-HSR8C2D-OBG
Figure 56: PX-HSR8C2D-OBG
The PX-HSR8C2D-OBG has 8 HD-BNC connectors mounted on the metal back panel of the back module.
There are 2 DensiShield ports on the module - one of them accepts up to 8 electrical inputs and the other can output up to 8 electrical outputs. The DensiShield ports are intended for expansion.
The PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG interfaces with the PX-OB Output Module to output up to 16 outputs. See
Output Modules (PX-OB) (see "Input Modules (PX-IB)" on page 101) for details on the PX-OB Output
module.
Power Consumption
Table 69: PX-HSR8C2D-OBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 14.1W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
14.53W
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 124
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules
PX-HSR8C2D-OBG/PX-HSR8O2D-OBG Parametric Control
The PX-HSR8C2D-OBG/PX-HSR8O2S-OBG Module can be controlled via the Controller. When you access a module (by clicking on it in the list of Output Modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of PX-HSR8C2D-OBG/PX-HSR8O2D-OBG modules in the frame is also displayed on the left.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 125
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing
Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-
FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-
FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
The 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Demux Input Boards add Video and Audio processing to input boards in the IP3 Frame.
The PT-FSDMX-IBG back module provides BNC connectors.
The PT-FSDMXO-IBG back module provides optical inputs through SFP fiber optical receiver modules.
Each SDI path is processed independently, and supports SD, 1.5Gb/s HD, 3Gb/s HD and Dual Link formats.The De-embedded, sample rate converted and processed audio data of all 8 SDI channels is provided to the audio crosspoint for distribution. Both modules consume up to 50 watts each, depending on operating conditions.
Figure 57: PT-FSDMX-IBG Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 126
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Figure 58: PT-FSDMXO-IBG Module
The PT-FSDMX-IBG input board runs in Demux-only mode and Framesync mode.
Back Module Variants
The PT-FSDMX-IBG SD/HD/3G Framesync Demux Front Module can be used with the following back module variants:
Module Type
Electrical Back Module
Optical Back Module
Electrical Back Module with
Densishield
Optical Back Module with
Densishield
Module Name and Description
PT-FSDXM-IBG
See Electrical/BNC Back Module
PT-FSDMXO-IBG
See Optical/SFP Back Module (PT-
Connectors
8 BNC Connectors
8 Fiber Connectors (4 dual Rx SFPs)
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG
See Electrical Back Module (HD-
BNC) with DensiShield (PT-
PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG
See Optical Back Module (SFP) with
DensiShield (PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG) (on
8 HD-BNC Connectors and 1 Densishield
Connector
8 fiber Receivers and 1 DensiShield connector
Note: For modules with DensiShield, avoid downward pressure on DensiShield cables when installing, to prevent damage or connectivity issues.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 127
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Electrical/BNC Back Module (PT-FSDMX-IBG)
Figure 59: PT-FSDMX-IBG electrical back module
Figure 60: PT-FSDMX-IBG electrical back module
Optical/SFP Back Module (PT-FSDMXO-IBG)
Figure 61: PT-FSDMXO-IBG Optical Back Module
Figure 62: PT-FSDMXO-IBG Optical Back Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 128
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Electrical Back Module (HD-BNC) with DensiShield (PT-
FSDX8C1D-IBG)
The PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Input module is based on the PT-FSDMX-IBG module and it provides 8 input SDI options via HD-BNC connectors. In addition, these 8 input SDI signals are re-clocked and output via a
DensiShield connector. This input module enables video matrix expansion.
Figure 63: PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Back Module
Figure 64: PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Back Module
Optical Back Module (SFP) with DensiShield (PT-FSDX8O1D-
IBG)
The PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG Input module is based on the PT-FSDMX-IBG module and it provides 8 input SDI options via SFP connectors. In addition, these 8 input SDI signals are re-clocked and output via a
DensiShield connector. This input module enables video matrix expansion.
Figure 65: PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG Back Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 129
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Figure 66: PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG Back Module
Specifications
Number of Inputs
Package
Connector
Impedance
Wavelengths
Receiver Sensitivity
Bit Error Rate
Number of Outputs
Power Consumption
SD SDI / ASI
(270Mb/s)
Format
Return Loss
Equalization
HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s)
PT-FSDMX-IBG
8
N/A
BNC (IEC169-8)
75 ohms
N/A
N/A
N/A
PT-FSDMXO-IBG
8
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG
8
PT-FSDX8COD-IBG
8
4x Dual Channel
Receiver SFP Modules
N/A 4x Dual Channel
Receiver SFP Modules
LC with PC/UPC polish HD-BNC/DensiShield LC with PC/UPC polish
100 ohms
(DensiShield)
N/A 75 ohms (HD-BNC)
100 ohms
(DensiShield)
N/A 1260nm – 1620nm
-23dBm (PIN Receiver) N/A
Complies with SMPTE
297-2006
N/A
1260nm – 1620nm
-23dBm (PIN Receiver)
Complies with SMPTE
297-2006
1 DensiShield
Connector
N/A
Up to 50 watts (max consumption, depending on operating conditions)
Up to 50 watts (max consumption, depending on operating conditions)
Up to 52 watts (max consumption, depending on operating conditions)
SMPTE 259M, ASI
1 DensiShield
Connector
Up to 52 watts (max consumption, depending on operating conditions)
525i59.94, 625i50, ASI
> 18 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz
Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 ft (300m), typical, of Belden 8281 coaxial cable
See Equalization Information for PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG (on page 131)
SMPTE 292M
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 130
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Format and image sample structure
Return loss
Equalization
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
PT-FSDMX-IBG PT-FSDMXO-IBG
SMPTE274M (1080i, 1080sF, 1080p)
SMPTE296M (720p)
> 18 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG PT-FSDX8COD-IBG
Adaptive cable equalization for up to 590 ft (180 m), typical, of Belden 1694A co-axial cable
HD-SDI (3Gb/s)
Format and image sample structure
Return loss
Equalization
SMPTE 424M
SMPTE 425M Level A
SMPTE 372M
> 15 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
> 10 dB (typical) from 1485 MHz to 2970 MHz
Adaptive cable equalization, up to 328 ft (100 m), typical, of Belden 1694A co-axial cable
Equalization Information for PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG
The cable length is 300 meters, Belden 8281, but the following applies in addition:
Note: The PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG uses an extended 3G-reach equalization. When combined with Belden 8281 coaxial cable, a pathological pattern, and a non-SPMTE424 (6.1.7)-compliant signal with excessive output amplitude excursions, the source equalization may be reduced to between 200 and 300 m for
SD-SDI signal.
This condition typically only occurs with older SD-SDI equipment having a 1uF capacitor on the output.
All recent and multi-rate SD/HD/3G equipment is compliant with the standard (has at least a 4.7uF capacitor on the output), and can achieve 300 m with 8281 cable and pathological pattern.
Video Processing Features
SD-SDI (270Mb/s) standards - 525, 625
HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s) standards - 720p50, 720p59, 720p60, 1080i50, 1080i59.94,
1080i60, 1080psF24, 1080psF23
HD-SDI (3Gb/s) standards – 1080p50, 1080p59.94, 1080p60, SMPTE 372M Dual Link
Framesync mode or Delay mode (when equipped with Framesync option)
Freeze modes: Frame, Field1, Field2
High noise immunity (TRS error resilience) and glitch-less processing (fast switching
without freeze) of input feeds, that were asynchronously switched on the
recommended switching point (as defined in SMPTE RP168)
User selectable Loss-of-Video modes: Black, Freeze, Pass
Video Frame Synchronizer with H,V Phase control and fixed frame delay on top of
variable delay
Video Frame Delay: up to 16 Frames (all standards)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 131
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Video ProcAmp: Gain, Offset, Hue, Black/White Clip
SMPTE 352M Video Payload: Detection, Insertion (HD and 3G only)
EDH (SD) and CRC (HD): Detection, Insertion
Automatic ASI detection and bypass
Bypass mode (no Video/Audio processing)
Video Processing Notes
VANC/HANC Data other than embedded Audio is not processed. Closed Captioning data, Teletext data or SMPTE 12M Timecode (LTC, VITC), for instance, will be dropped or repeated together with the active video content, every time the Frame Synchronizer drops or repeats a frame.
VANC/HANC data for Delay mode channels (including embedded Audio), all is passed through the delay memory unprocessed. Ancillary data remains untouched. The absolute delay from In to Out can be changed arbitrarily within the predefined limits.
SMPTE 372M Dual-Link formats supported, with 16 (mono) channels of Audio processed. Processed
Video/Audio data exits the board as a single 3Gb/s stream.
Non-PCM Audio data (Dolby-E or Dolby-D) is not processed by the Audio Synchronizer / Audio Delay
/ Audio ProcAmp processing blocks. It is passed alongside the active video content through the
Video Frame Synchronizer memory and a frame's worth of non-PCM data is dropped or repeated - together with the active video content every time the Video Frame Synchronizer drops or repeats a frame.
Audio Processing Features
The following audio functionality is supported per SDI channel
De-embedding 4 groups (16 mono channels) of Audio prior to the Frame/Audio Synchronizer
Embedding 4 groups (16 mono channels) of Audio after the Frame/Audio Synchronizer.
Sample Rate Conversion (with bypass capability on a per stereo-pair basis). See Sample Rate
Audio Synchronizer
Audio Delay (up to 3000ms / mono channel)
Audio Proc (Gain, Mute, Invert)
Audio Sum (on a per mono-channel basis, but based on a pre-defined list of Sums)
Audio Swap (on a per mono-channel basis, but based on a pre-defined list of Swaps)
Audio Test Tone Generator (Off, 400Hz, 2kHz, 4kHz)
Quiet Audio Transitions when two sources of same data- and frame-rate are switched upstream. See
Quiet Audio Transitions (on page 133)
Audio Processing Notes and Restrictions
De-embedding: For De-embedding, audio must be embedded synchronously at a sample rate of
48kHz.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 132
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Embedded Dolby-E frames must be properly aligned with the Video frame in order to be transferred from the Frame Synchronizer’s input clock domain into the output clock domain. Proper alignment
(position of guard-band) is important since Dolby-E frames can be dropped or repeated alongside the active video content.
Embedded Audio: All embedded Audio is embedded synchronously at a sample rate of 48kHz
TDMed Audio data (all 128 mono channels) will have a sample rate of 48kHz and will be in the same
Audio clock domain, locked to the applied Video Reference
SMPTE 372M (Dual link): Only the 16 audio channels de-embedded from Link A will be processed, re-embedded into the Link A of the outgoing SDI stream and sent via TDM to the ATDM Crosspoint for further routing.
Also see Word Length (on page 142), ADS Clean (on page 141), and Group Active Channels (on page
Audio Order of Operations
1. Insert Tone (if enabled)
2. Polarity Reversal and Level Adjust
3. Sum
4. Swap/Copy
5. Mute (if enabled)
Note: If an Audio channel conveys non-PCM data, such as Dolby-E/D, and a test tone for such channel gets enabled, the non-PCM data will be replaced with PCM data (the 'tone'). 'Mute' also works on non-
PCM data, but all other Audio processing operations (Polarity Reversal, Level Adjust, Sum, Swap/Copy) will have no effect on non-PCM data.
Sample Rate Conversion
Non-PCM Audio data (such as Dolby-E/D) cannot be sample rate converted, and is transferred from the input clock domain to the output clock domain by dropping or repeating a full frame of non-PCM data, every time the Video Frame Synchronizer reaches its roll-over point.
The downstream clock for the SRCs will be locked to the applied Video reference.
The clock transfer of non-PCM data by dropping or repeating a frame worth of data works if (1)
Framesync option is installed (2) The SDI channel(s) with embedded non-PCM data qualify for
Framesync mode (frame-rate of the ingested signal(s) match the frame-rate of the Reference signal)
(3) ADS Clean is set to ‘No’.
Quiet Audio Transitions
Quiet audio transitions are “popless” transitions when two sources of the same data and frame rate are switched upstream in the serial domain (e.g. by an upstream router).
These transitions work independent of whether the two sources are synchronous or asynchronous to each other or with respect to the reference signal, and it works regardless of the switching point.
There are no user controllable parameters for adjusting the timing of the transition.
The transition is triggered when the video_present flag gets temporarily de-asserted because of a discontinuity in the incoming SDI stream, caused by the asynchronous switch in the serial domain.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 133
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
When this happens, the Audio De-embedder has still 32 good audio samples in its output buffer, amounting to roughly 666us worth of audio data at a 48kHz sample rate. Those samples are being used for a fast, yet clean fade-out of the audio data, originating from the old source.
PT-FSDMX-IBG Licensing
PT-FSDMX-IBG without Frame Sync Option
Without Framesync, the module behaves like an advanced version of the PT-DEMUX, with the following differences over the basic PT-DEMUX:
SDI data going into the PT-FSDMX-IBG no longer has to be of a common data-rate in order to be processed (de-embedding audio data from the SDI streams and sending processed Audio data via
TDM to the Audio crosspoint). A mix of SD, HD, and 3G operation between channels of matching frame rate is supported.
De-embedded PCM Audio of all SDI channels, regardless of their frame and data rate is sample-rateconverted into a common downstream Audio clock domain (locked to Video Reference) and can be processed (Gain, Mute, Invert, Sum, Swap) before the Audio channels get combined into a single
128 channel TDM stream.
Processed Audio can be re-embedded into the outgoing SDI stream if the incoming SDI stream is locked to the Video Reference. Re-embedding of the processed Audio data is controlled via the
Group Embedding Mode parameter.
SDI channels conveying Dolby E must be locked to the Video Reference since non-PCM data cannot be sample-rate-converted (the Framesync option is required for transferring non-PCM data from input to output clock domain by dropping/repeating frames).
PT-FSDMX-IBG with Frame Sync Option
Frame sync is a licensable option. To acquire a Frame Sync license, contact your Customer Service representative. Use the License Key parameter to add a license to the module. Modules with the optional Frame Sync license have these additional features:
Video Frame Synchronizer and Delay
Audio Synchronizer
Modules with the Frame Sync license installed operate in the following modes:
Framesync mode—SDI channels are genlocked to a common reference source, which can be either
NTSC, PAL or TriLevel. Your video reference has to be the same frame rate as your input. The input channels can be asynchronous to each other.
Delay mode—SDI channels will be processed in their recovered input clock domain. In Delay mode, some restrictions apply to the processing of Audio data.
Mixed operation—Some channels run in Framesync mode while others run in Delay mode.
When operating the Frame Sync in Delay mode, the audio embedders are automatically turned off. Any ancillary data will be passed unprocessed (aside from any video delay). ADS Clean (wiping out the entire ancillary data space) can still be applied if the user wishes to do so. If the input video frame rate does
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 134
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG) not match the genlock frame rate for a channel, that channel is automatically placed into Delay Mode.
This information is reflected in the Frame Sync Status parameter.
Features based on Licensing
Processing Feature
Video Framesync
H/V Phase Control
Frame Offset
Freeze
Video ProcAmp
ASi Bypass
Video
FS
FS, DLY
FS, DLY
FS, DLY
FS, DLY, DMX
FS, DLY, DMX
Embedded Audio
Audio Sample Rate Conversion
Audio Sync
Audio Delay
Audio ProcAmp
FS, DMX
FS
FS, DMX
FX, DMX
Bypass Mode
FS=Framesync Mode with Framesync License
DLY=Delay Mode with Framesync License.
DMX=Demux-only Operation without Framesync License.
Audio TDM
FS, DLY, DMX
FS
FS, DLY, DMX
FS, DLY, DMX
FS, DLY, DMX
PT-FSDMX-IBG Controllable Parameters
The PT-FSDMX-IBG Module can be controlled via the Controller. When you access a PT-FSDMX-IBG module (by clicking on it in the list of modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of PT-
FSDMX-IBG modules in the frame is also displayed on the left.
The following are user-controllable parameters for PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG.
General Parameters (on page 136 )
Genlock Parameters (on page 136)
Input Parameters (on page 137)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 135
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
General Parameters
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Table 70: PT-FSDMX-IBG - General Parameters
Name
General Info Temperature (x 2)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Root
Fan Status
(TABLE PARAMETER)
FPGA (x 2) DDR Status (x 2)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Serial Number
License Key
Licensed Options
Description
Control Status
V-Bit Mute Enable
Software Version
Control FPGA Version
Processing FPGA Version
Type Options
Indicates the temperature of the FPGA RO <String> in Degrees
Celsius
Indicates proper functioning of the module’s fan unit
Indicates proper functioning of the DDR memory
RO
Bad
Good
RO
Bad
Good
<String> Displays the module’s unique identifier
Activates the Frame Sync option
Displays activated options
Reports current Control Status
Enables automatic muting of audio outputs when the V-bit is set
Muting on a detected V-Bit applies to PCM audio channels only. Non-PCM audio channels will not be muted.
Indicates software version
RW <String>
RO
None
Frame Sync
RO
Please Wait
Ready to Set
RW
Yes
No
RO <String>
Indicates firmware version
Indicates software version
RO <String>
RO <String>
Genlock Parameters
Table 71: PT-FSDMX-IBG - Genlock Parameters
Name
Sync Select
Genlock Video Present
Genlock Video Locked
Genlock Standard
Description
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Reports the presence of the reference video signal
Reports the locked status of the reference video signal
Indicates the video standard detected on the genlock input
Type Options
RW
RO
RO
RO
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
No
Yes
No
Yes
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 136
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Type Options
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
Input Parameters
Table 72: PT-FSDMX-IBG - Input Parameters
Name Description
VIDEO
SDI Video Standard (x 8) Displays the SDI video signal standard
Type Options
RO
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080p 50
1080p 59.94
1080p 60
1080p 50 DL
1080p 59.94 DL
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 137
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Name
Signal Presence (x 8)
EDH Present (x 8)
Description
Reports the presence of the
SDI input video signal
Reports the presence of EDH in the input SDI signal
CRC/EDH Error Counter (x 8) Reports the number of chrominance CRC/EDH errors that have occurred
CRC/EDH Error Clear (x 8) Clears all CRC/EDH error counters
Type Options
1080p 60 DL
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
RO
No
Yes
RO
RO
No
Yes
0 to 65535
RW
Input Optical Power
(Optical modules only)
SFP Type
(Optical modules only)
Dolby E Detection
Reports input optical signal power level
Shows the type of optical receiver installed
Allows Dolby E detection based on presence of Dolby E
Header. Can be used with or without PCM/non-PCM
Channel Status Bit correction.
RO
RO
RW
No
Yes
Too Low
-32 - 1 dBm
Too High
Unknown
N/A
(G)Dual-Rx PIN
Non-Audio Channel Status Bit Only
Dolby Header Detection
Dolby Header Detection with Cbit Correction
AUDIO
Fade Rate
Word Length (xb)
Specifies the fade rate
Specifies the audio word length for all audio channels within the SDI stream
RW
RW
0 - 10 (10) s, in 1-second steps
16 bits
20 bits
24 bits
AUDIO GROUP
Presence (x 4)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Active Channels (x 4)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Reports the presence of the specified audio group in the
SDI signal
Indicates which channels are active
RO
RO
No
Yes
None/Unknown
CH1
CH2
CH12
CH3
CH13
CH23
CH123
CH4
CH14
CH24
CH124
CH34
CH134
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 138
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Sampling Rate (x 4)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
DeEmbed Control
Embedded Mode
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Description
Reports the sampling rate from the control packet of the specified audio group
Specifies the operation of the audio de-embedder when an error occurs; it will either repeat the last audio sample or mute when an error occurs.
Type Options
CH234
CH1234
RO
RW
48.0 kHz
44.1 kHz
32.0 kHz
N/A
FreeRun
Repeat
Mute
Selects the embedding mode for the specified audio group
RW
Auto
Off
Append
Overwrite
AUDIO CHANNEL
Audio Format (x 16)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Tones (x 16)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Reports the AES format
(PCM/non-PCM) of specified output embedded audio channel
Selects the tone level for the specified audio channel
RO
RW
PCM
Non-PCM
Channel Delay (x 16) RW
Off
400 Hz
1 KHz
2 KHz
4 KHz
0 - 3000 ms in 1 ms steps
Level Adjust (x 16)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Polarity Reversal (x 16)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Audio Mute (x 16)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Selects the amount of delay applied to the audio channel
Adjusts the audio level (gain) for each audio channel
Specifies whether the audio channel should be inverted
Enables muting for the specified output channel
RW
RW
RW
-18 dB - 18 dB (0) in 0.1 dB steps
No
Yes
Off
On
AUDIO STEREO PAIR
SRC Control (x 8)
Delay Track (x 8)
Engages or disengages the sample rate converter
RW
Auto
Enable
Bypass
Reset Toggle A
Reset Toggle B
By toggling one of the eight
Reset Toggle A / Reset Toggle
B parameters of the selected
SDI channel instance, Audio
Rd/Wr pointers in the Audio
Synchronizer, affecting all eight Stereo pairs of the selected SDI channel, will be reset.
RW
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 139
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Summing (x 8)
Swap/Copy (x 8)
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Description
Specifies whether to sum the audio within a pair
Left to Right - the summed audio is placed in the right channel
Right to Left - the summed audio is placed in the left channel
Both - the summed audio is placed in both left and right channels
Specifies whether to swap or copy the audio within a pair; able to swap left and right channels, copy left channel to the right channel, and copy the right channel to the left
RW
Type Options
RW
None
Right to Left
Left to Right
Both
No Swap
Swap
Right to Left
Left to Right
PROC AMP
Y Gain (x 8)
Cb Gain (x 8)
-3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
-3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
Cr Gain (x 8)
Y Offset (x 8)
Cb Offset (x 8)
Cr Offset (x 8)
White Clip Enable (x 8)
White Clip Level (x 8)
Black Clip Enable (x 8)
Black Clip Level (x 8)
Adjusts gain for the Y channel RW
Adjusts gain to the Cb color difference component
RW
RW Adjusts gain to the Cr color difference component
Adjusts offset for the Y channel
RW
RW Adjusts offset for the Cb channel
Adjusts offset for the Cr channel
RW
Controls level clipping according to the White Clip
Level control
Sets the white clip level
Controls level clipping according to the Black Clip
Level control
Sets the black clip level
RW
RW
RW
RW
-3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
±100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
±100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
±100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
Disable
Enable
636.9 to 763.1 mV (700 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
Disable
Enable
-47.9 to +47.9 mV (0.0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
Hue (x 8)
FRAME SYNC
Horizontal Phase (x 8)
†
Adjusts the hue of the incoming digital video signal
RW -180 to +180° (0°)
Adjusts the horizontal timing
Note:The usable range depends on the video standard.
RW
0.000 us to 29.616 us (1080p 30,1035i 60)
0.000 us to 14.808 us (1080p 60, 1080p 60 DL)
0.000 us to 29.646 us (1080p 29, 1080i 59)
0.000 us to 14.823 us (1080p 59, 1080p 59.94 DL)
0.000 us to 35.542 us (1080p 25, 1080i 50)
0.000 us to 17.771 us (1080p 50, 1080p 50 DL)
0.000 us to 37.024 us (1080p 24, 1080sF 24)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 140
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Name
Vertical Phase (x 8)
Frame Offset (x 8)
†
†
Description
Adjusts the vertical timing
Note:The usable range depends on the video standard.
Determines the number of frames the video is offset
Frame Sync / Demux Mode Sets the operational mode of the frame sync, delay or sync.
Available with the optional
Frame Sync license.
Type Options
0.000 us to 37.061 us (1080p 23.98, 1080sF 23.98)
0.000 us to 31.987 us (1080i 50_295)
0.000 us to 22.209 us (720p 60)
0.000 us to 22.231 us (720p 59.94)
0.000 us to 26.653 us (720p 50)
0.000 us to 44.431 us (720p 30)
0.000 us to 44.475 us (720p 29)
0.000 us to 53.320 us (720p 25)
0.000 us to 63.518 us (525i 59.94)
0.000 us to 63.963 us (625i 50)
RW
RW
RW
0–1124 lines (1080p/I/sF)
0–1249 lines
(1080i 50 SMPTE 295M)
0–749 lines (720p)
0–524 lines (525i 59.94)
0–624 lines (625i 50)
0 - 17 frames (Delay mode)
0 - 16 frames (Sync mode)
FS: Sync Mode
FS: Delay Mode
Demux
Bypass
RO
Frame Sync / Demux Status Indicates whether the frame sync is locked, and what it is locked to
Force Freeze Enables video freeze RW
Force Freeze Mode
Loss of Video Mode
Fast Switch
Specifies the type of freeze, field 1, field 2 or frame
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
Enable fast switching
RW
RW
RW
No
Yes
Field 1
Field 2
Frame
Pass
Freeze
Black
No
Yes
Notes
ADS Clean
In all modes of operation (Framesync/Delay/Demux-only mode), ADS Clean set to Yes wipes out all
HANC data with the exception of EDH (SD only).
When a channel is operated in Framesync mode or if a board without a Framesync license (Demux-only) has the ingested SDI signal already locked to the reference signal applied to the board, the Audio
Embedder re-populates the HANC space with Audio data coming from the Audio processor. In order for
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 141
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG) the Audio Embedder to re-populate empty HANC space, the group embedding mode has to be set to either ‘Auto’ or ‘Append’. Overwrite only applies if there is ’something’ to overwrite.
When operating a channel in Framesync mode, use ADS Clean with extra caution because it wipes out any non-PCM Audio data (Dolby E/D) which is lost forever. Non-PCM Audio data is not re-embedded by the Audio Embedder, since all non-PCM data bypasses the Audio processor altogether. With ADS Clean set to ‘Yes’, non-PCM Audio data will no longer appear in the outgoing SDI stream or show up in the
TDM stream going to the Audio crosspoint. To counter this, a new Audio Synchronizer IP is required where the clock domain transfer of Dolby data (by dropping or repeating a frame worth of Dolby data) happens in the Audio Synchronizer’s memory rather than in the Video Frame-synchronizer’s memory.
Word Length
The Word Length (x8) parameter can be set through the Audio section of the GUI to 16, 20, or 24 bits on a per SDI channel basis. 20 bits is the default and is applicable when the video standard is SD-SDI
(525/625).
If the SD-SDI Video has extended Audio packets (which can apply to any of up to four groups of embedded Audio), Audio data embedded in such group(s) should have a word length of 24 bits. When the processed audio data word length is 20 bits (determined by parameter ‘Word Length' parameter), the Audio Embedder cannot overwrite existing extended Audio packets. There are 2 options in this case:
Turn on ADS Clean prior to re-embedding new Audio data, to wipe out any existing Audio packets
(regular and extended).
Set the Word Length (x8) parameter for the SDI channel in question to match the word length of the
Audio data embedded in the incoming SDI stream.
The Word Length bits for processed Audio data are not auto-detected (based on the detected word length of the embedded Audio data) and set. This is to allow the flexibility for users to steer the word length of the re-embedded Audio data such that it matches the word length of Audio data that originates from a different source (for example, Audio received via TDM).
Group Active Channels
Due to the absence of audio control packets in SD-SDI modes, there is no (easy) way for the Audio Deembedder to figure out whether channels within any of the present groups are active or not. This is why in SD-SDI modes, even if audio channels are active, their presence is reported as 'None/Unknown'. There is not enough room in the control space to extend the number of choices in order to notify the user that the information is not available because of the SD format.
Video Frame Synchronization
The frame synchronizer offers two modes of operation: Delay mode and Synchronizer (Sync) mode.
These modes can be chosen using the Frame Sync Mode parameter.
In Delay mode, the output video is synchronized to the input video.
In Sync mode, the output video is synchronized to the reference video. The reference standard you can use depends on the output video standard you have set
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 142
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Table 73: Supported Reference and Output Video Standard Combinations in Sync Mode
Reference Standard
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 60
720p 59.94
720p 50
Output Video Standard
1080i 59.94
1080p 59.94
1080p 29.97
720p 59.94
525i 59.94
1080p 59.94 DL
1080i 50
1080p 50
1080p 25
720p 50
625i 50
1080p 50 DL
720p 60
1080p 60
720p 59.94
1080p 59.94
720p 50
1080p 50
Reference Standard
1080i 60
1080p 30
1080i 59.94
1080p 29.97
1080i 50
1080p 25
1080p 24
1080sF 24
1080p 23.98
1080sF 23.98
Output Video Standard
1080i 60
1080p 60
1080p 30
720p 60
1080p 60 DL
1080i 59.94
1080p 29.97
1080p 59.94
720p 59.94
525i 59.94
1080p 59.94 DL
1080i 50
1080p 50
1080p 25
720p 50
625i 50
1080p 50 DL
1080p 24
1080sF 24
1080p 23.98
1080sF 23.98
In both Sync mode and Delay mode, PT-FSDMX provides several controls to manipulate the output video signal:
Horizontal timing
Vertical timing
Adjustable frame delay
Manually freeze output video on first or second field (interlaced standards), or on the whole frame (all standards)
Audio Synchronization
By default, PT-FSDMX-IBG and its variants synchronize de-embedded audio with timing information from the video frame synchronizer prior to re-embedding the audio.
When operating an SDI channel in Frame Sync mode (FS license must be installed) and if the ingested signal qualifies for Framesync operation (frame-rate matches the frame-rate of the selected Reference signal), the de-embedded audio will be automatically delayed to match the video delay. Additionally, up to three seconds of delay can be added through the Audio Channel Delay parameter.
Group (1-4) Deembedding Control
The following table describes options for the Group (1–4) Deembedding Control parameter.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 143
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 74: Deembedding Control Options
Item
Repeat
Mute
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Description
Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the de-embedder repeats the last good AES sample.
Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the de-embedder mutes the current outgoing AES sample.
Audio Test Tones
The following table describes the frequency and levels of each audio output test tone, available as a selection from each of the Output Ch (1–16) Source Select parameters:
Table 75: Audio Test Tones
Test Tone
Test Tone 1
Frequency
400 Hz
Test Tone 2
Test Tone 3
Test Tone 4
1 kHz
2 kHz
4 kHz
Fast Video Switch
When input video is switched between two sources while both sources are within vertical blanking, use the Fast Switch parameter to enable fast video switching between the sources. In this mode, output video is not frozen when both sources are within the vertical blanking area when the switch takes place.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 144
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
LED Indicators
Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Figure 67: PT-FSDMX Card-Edge LED Indicators
Table 76: PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG Specific LEDs
LED Function
Channel Status
Ch (1 - 8) Red: Power on test failed
FPGA Temp
FPGA Temp (A - B) Red: Above temperature limit
Power-Up sequence
Due to the complexity of the board and its parameter list, it takes about 2.5 minutes after power-cycling a board before it is fully operational.
About 30 seconds after power-cycling, a board is ready to detect input signals, but it outputs a 75% color bar test pattern of the same video standard as the detected input signal until the PT-Resource card has completed uploading the previously used configuration (parameters).
The readiness of the board is reflected by the read-only Control Status parameter.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 145
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules (PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG, PT-FSDMX8O1D-IBG)
Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image
The PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG modules maintain a backup image of the last working firmware at all times. In the event of an upgrade failure, the module will revert back to its backup image to maintain operation on the board. You can verify the version that is current running on the module by looking at the version parameters: Software Version, Control FPGA Version and Processing FPGA Version.
Upgrading the firmware on PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSDMXO-IBG modules takes approximately 50 minutes. Multiple (identical) boards can be upgraded at once in batches of up to 16 boards (= one
'zone'). A 'batch' upgrade takes about as long as upgrading a single board.
Always wait for the 'Firmware upgrade successful' message before power-cycling the system, exchanging boards, or carrying out any other maintenance work that could interfere with the upgrade process. Do not interrupt the power supply or tamper with a board while an upgrade is in progress. This could corrupt the firmware, necessitating a restart of the upgrade process.
Note: If the Software Version shows 0.00, this indicates that the PT-FSDMX-IBG is in failsafe mode. In this mode, the board will only support upgrade operations and basic control with the Platinum Resource module. You can perform software upgrades as usual while the module is in failsafe mode, but after the upgrade is completed, the module will need to be hot-swapped in order to have the new firmware take effect.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 146
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux
Output Module
The PX-HSRMXxxxx-OBG is a Frame Synchronizer and Audio Mux Output Module that adds unprecedented Video and Audio processing power to output boards in the IP3 Frame. The PX-
HSRMXxxxx-OBG Output Frame Sync card has 8 processed outputs and 8 unprocessed outputs.
Processed outputs refer to signals that pass through the Video/Audio Frame Synchronizer which provides audio muxing capabilities. Unprocessed outputs refer to SDI streams that are reclocked in the serial domain but are otherwise untouched.
Each Module presents 16 physical ports. There are two versions of the output card each supporting either optical or coaxial connectivity. Each version of the card supports processing on eight outputs. The additional eight outputs are either used for system expansion beyond a single Platinum IP3 frame or as standard video outputs. Both versions of the module are configured via the IP3 Database Editor.
Video and Audio Frame Synchronizers are available for each of the 8 processed SDI channels in addition to Audio Mux functionality. Each SDI path is processed independently with support for SD, 1.5 Gb/s HD,
3 Gb/s HD, and 3 Gb/s Dual Link formats. ASI signals are reported and processing stages are automatically bypassed. Both full Framesync and Delay modes are available.
The PX-HSRMX-OBGxxxx module consumes up to 75 watts, depending on the specific module type and on operating conditions. Ensure that the IP3 frame system has a sufficient number of power supplies to meet the demand resulting from the actual number of modules installed.
Note: See the Platinum IP3 Controller manual (Module Specific Configurations section) for details on how to configure this module.
Table 77: PX-HSRMX-OBG Variants
Module Description
PX-HSR8CMX8C-OBG Electrical
PX-HSR8OMX8O-OBG Optical
PX-HSRMX8C2D-OBG Electrical
Module with DensiShield (on
SD/HD/3G Mux Output Module w/ 16
HD BNC back panel
SD/HD/3G Mux Output Module w/ 16
Fiber/8 SFP back panel
SD/HD/3G Mux Output Module w/ 8 HD
BNC + 2 DensiShield back panel
PX-HSRMX8O2D-OBG Optical
Module with DensiShield (on
SD/HD/3G Mux Output Module w/ 8
Fiber/4 SFP + 2 DensiShield back panel
Outputs
16 HD BNC Outputs
8 processed, 8 unprocessed
16 Optical Outputs
8 processed, 8 unprocessed
8 HD BNC Outputs, all processed.
1 Densishield Output for System expansion, unprocessed
1 Densishield Input for System expansion
8 Optical Outputs, all processed.
1 Densishield Output for Router Matrix expansion, unprocessed
1 Densishield Input for Router Matrix expansion
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 147
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
PX-HSR8CMX8C-OBG Electrical Output Module
Figure 68: HSR8CMX8C-OBG Electrical Back Module
PX-HSR8OMX8O-OBG Optical Output Module
Figure 69: PX-HSR8OMX8O-OBG Optical Output Module
PX-HSRMX8C2D-OBG Electrical Module with DensiShield
Figure 70: PX-HSRMX8C2D-OBG Electrical Module with DensiShield
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 148
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
PX-HSRMX8O2D-OBG Optical Module with DensiShield
Figure 71: PX-HSRMX8O2D-OBG Optical Module with DensiShield
PX-HSRMX-OBG Operation Modes
There are different operation modes available, depending on whether or not you have a Frame Sync license.
MUX only mode (without Frame Sync license)
For proper audio muxing operation, each SDI channel destined for Audio MUX must be locked to the
Reference signal provided to the board. While SDI channels can be of different data rates (e.g. SD SDI,
HD, HD 3G), their field/frame-rates need to match the those of the applied Reference.
In the Frame Sync / Mux Mode menu, the following modes of operation can be selected on a per SDI channel basis:
MUX: Auto Detect
Note: MUX: Auto Detect is the recommended operation mode for boards without a frame sync license.
This mode auto checks if SDI channels are locked to the Reference signal provided to the board.
Locked SDI channels
All supported Audio muxing operations are applicable
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports locked channels as Mux: Locked
CHANNEL STATUS LED associated with the SDI channel at the front card edge will be lit green
Unlocked SDI channels
No Audio muxing will be performed and the channel will bypass all processing stages on the board
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports unlocked channels as Bypass
CHANNEL STATUS LED at the front card edge associated with the SDI channel will be off
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 149
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
MUX: Always On
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Note: For channels that are asynchronous to the Reference, re-embedded Audio will suffer disturbances.
In this mode, SDI channels are processed (audio muxing operations are supported), regardless of whether the channel is locked to the Reference signal.
Locked SDI channels
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports locked channels as Mux: Locked
CHANNEL STATUS LED associated with the SDI channel at the front card edge will be lit green
Unlocked SDI channels:
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports unlocked channels as Mux: Unlocked
CHANNEL STATUS LED associated with the SDI channel at the front card edge will be lit Red
Bypass Mode
SDI channels bypass all processing stages
No Audio muxing takes place when operating a channel in Bypass mode
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports channels operating in Bypass mode as Bypass
Frame Sync Mode
Frame Sync is a licensable option. If you do not have the Frame Sync license, this feature will not be available. To acquire a Frame Sync license, contact your Customer Service representative. A license can be added for the module using the License Key parameter.
Frame Sync mode is required if the incoming SDI data is asynchronous to the reference signal applied to the board. With Frame Sync (PT-FSOB-OPT) installed, incoming SDI data does not need to have a common data rate to be processed (muxing audio back into SDI streams). A mix of SD, HD, 3G, 3G DL is supported for channels with the same frame rate. It is important to note that if the channel and the reference signal do not share a common frame rate, inputs are processed in Delay mode (no audio muxing).
In the Frame Sync / Mux Mode menu, the following operation modes can be selected (on a per SDI channel basis):
Frame Sync: Sync Mode
An SDI channel qualifies for Frame Sync: Sync Mode if its field or frame rate matches that of the
Reference signal provided to the board.
No Reference, Frame Sync: Sync Mode
If no Reference is present but the operation mode is set to Frame Sync: Sync Mode
The outgoing signal will be locked to a local and fixed 27MHz high precision Reference.
The Frame Sync / Mux Status menu will report channels set to Frame Sync: Sync Mode as
Frame Sync: Local Lock.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 150
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
External Reference
When an external Reference signal is applied to the frame (e.g. 525 or 625 Black, HD tri-level Sync), and the proper Reference Input has been selected for the board, and the Reference is being detected as ‘Present’ and ‘Locked’, and the SDI channel’s field-or frame-rate matches the rate of the
Reference signal
Video- and embedded Audio-data will be processed and synchronized to the applied Reference.
The Frame Sync / Mux Status menu will report channels set to Frame Sync: Sync Mode as
Frame Sync: Ext Lock.
Reference present and locked, different frame rate for SDI channel
When a Reference is present and locked, but the SDI channel’s field or frame rate doesn’t match the rate of the Reference signal
The channel will be automatically forced into Delay mode.
The Frame Sync / Mux Status menu will report channels set to Frame Sync: Sync Mode as
Frame Sync: Delay Rate Mismatch.
Frame Sync: Delay Mode
Note: In ‘Delay’ mode, only a restricted set of processing features can be applied to an SDI channel.
When operating the Frame Sync in Delay mode, the audio embedders are automatically turned off. Any ancillary data will be passed unprocessed (aside from any video delay).
If the input video frame rate does not match the genlock frame rate for a channel, that channel is automatically placed into Delay Mode. This information is reflected in the Frame Sync Status parameter.
An SDI channel can be forced into Delay mode operation by setting it to Frame Sync: Delay Mode.
Channels set to Frame Sync: Delay Mode will be reported as Frame Sync: Delay Forced by the
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu.
Bypass Mode
In Bypass mode, the SDI channel will bypass all processing stages.
No Framesync operation and no Audio muxing takes place when operating a channel in Bypass mode.
The Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports channel forced to operate in Bypass mode as Bypass.
PX-HSRMX-OBG Features
Key processing features for each channel are:
Video Frame Synchronizer and Delay
User selectable Loss-of-Video modes: Black, Freeze, Pass, Mute
Video ProcAmp: Gain, Offset, Hue, Black/White Clip
SMPTE 352M Video Payload: Detection, Insertion
EDH (SD) and CRC (HD): Detection, Insertion
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 151
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Automatic ASI detection and bypass
Audio De-Embedder: 4 groups, 4 mono channels per group
Audio Sample Rate Conversion (SRC) after de-embedding (PCM data only)
Audio Synchronizer and Delay (arbitrary Audio delay for PCM data only)
Audio Test Tone Generator
Audio ProcAmp: Gain, Mute, Invert, Sum, Swap
Audio Embedder with Append/Overwrite mode
Supports mix of embedded PCM and non-PCM (Dolby-E/D) data
Table 78: Features based on Licensing
Processing Feature
Video Framesync
Video
FS
Embedded Audio Audio TDM
H/V Phase Control FS, DLY
Frame Offset FS, DLY
Freeze FS, DLY
Video ProcAmp FS, DLY, MUX
ASI Bypass
Audio Sync (Sample rate conversion)
Audio Delay
FS, DLY, MUX
FS, DLY, MUX FS
FS, MUX FS, MUX
Audio ProcAmp FS, MUX FS, MUX
Dolby E Header Alignment
FS=Framesync Mode with Framesync License
DLY=Delay Mode with Framesync License
MUX=Mux-only Operation without Framesync License
FS, MUX
Framesync/Delay Mode requires a Framesync License.
Mux Mode is available on boards without the Framesync license installed.
In Mux Mode, SDI channels must be locked to the external reference for proper operation.
Audio Processing
The PX-HSRMX-OBG output module is equipped with an Audio TDM Receiver that supports a TDM data rate of 344 Mb/s and 128 channels of TDMed audio. The following audio functionality is supported per
SDI channel
De-embedding 4 groups (16 mono channels) of Audio prior to the Frame/Audio Synchronizer
Sample Rate Conversion (with bypass capability on a per stereo-pair basis) - Embedded Audio and
TDM Audio
Audio Synchronizer - Embedded Audio and Audio TDM
Audio Delay (> 3000ms / mono channel)
Audio Proc (Gain, Mute, Invert)
Audio Sum (on a per mono-channel basis, but based on a predefined list of Sums)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 152
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Audio Swap (on a per mono-channel basis, but based on a predefined list of Swaps)
Audio Test Tone Generator (Off, 400Hz, 2kHz, 4kHz)
Dolby-E Header alignment (for Dolby-E data received via TDM only)
Embedding 4 groups (16 mono channels) of Audio after the Frame/Audio Synchronizer.
Automatic Audio selection from video source (embedded audio) or associated 16 channels of Audio received via TDM.
Audio TDM channels if present (i.e. routed from the Audio crosspoint) take precedence over channels de-embedded from the video source.
Fixed mapping of Audio channels received via TDM and the eight SDI streams
(e.g. TDM1-16 -> SDI1, TDM17-32 -> SD).
Audio Processing Notes
De-embedding: For De-embedding, audio must be embedded synchronously at a sample rate of
48kHz.
Embedded Dolby-E frames must be properly aligned with the Video frame in order to be transferred from the Frame Synchronizer’s input clock domain into the output clock domain. Proper alignment
(position of guard-band) is important since Dolby-E frames can be dropped or repeated alongside the active video content.
TDMed Audio All Audio channels received from the Audio crosspoint via TDM are assumed to have a
48kHz sample rate and locked to the same Video reference applied to the board.
Automatic Dolby-E header alignment supported for Dolby-E data received via TDM, where Audio data (PCM or non-PCM) is expected to be already synchronous to the reference applied to the board. When receiving Dolby-E data via TDM, alignment with the actual Video data is unknown and it is therefore important to have the Dolby- E data automatically re-aligned prior to muxing it back into the SDI stream.
Sample Rate Conversion is applied to both, de-embedded and Audio TDM data, but only if it is PCM.
The downstream clock for the SRCs will be locked to the applied Video reference. Non-PCM Audio data (such as Dolby-E/D) cannot be sample rate converted.
If Non-PCM Audio originates from the ingested SDI channel ('embedded Audio'), it is transferred from the input clock domain to the output clock domain by dropping or repeating a full frame of non-PCM data, every time the Video Frame Synchronizer reaches its roll-over point.
If Non-PCM Audio is received via TDM, it is expected to be already in the output clock domain and therefore the SRC in the TDM path gets automatically bypassed.
Video Processing
SD-SDI (270Mb/s) standards - 525, 625
HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s) standards - 720p50, 720p59, 720p60, 1080i50, 1080i59.94, 1080i60, 1080psF24,
1080psF23
HD-SDI (3Gb/s) standards – SMPTE425 Level A, SMPTE 372M Dual Link
Framesync mode or Delay mode
Freeze modes: Frame, Field1, Field2
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 153
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
High noise immunity (TRS error resilience) and glitchless processing (fast switching without freeze) of input feeds, that were asynchronously switched on the recommended switching point (as defined in SMPTE RP168)
User selectable Loss-of-Video modes: Black, Freeze, Pass, Mute
Video Frame Synchronizer with H,V Phase control and fixed frame delay on top of variable delay
Video Frame Delay: up to 16 Frames (all standards)
Video ProcAmp: Gain, Offset, Hue, Black/White Clip
SMPTE 352M Video Payload: Detection, Insertion (HD and 3G only)
EDH (SD) and CRC (HD): Detection, Insertion
Automatic ASI detection and bypass
Video Processing Notes
VANC/HANC data other than embedded Audio is not processed. Closed Captioning data, Teletext data or SMPTE 12M Timecode (LTC, VITC), for instance, will be dropped or repeated together with the active video content, every time the Frame Synchronizer drops or repeats a frame.
VANC/HANC data for Delay mode channels (including embedded Audio) is passed through the delay memory unprocessed. Ancillary data remains untouched. The absolute delay from In to Out can be changed arbitrarily within the predefined limits (e.g. from 3us up to 16 frames + 3us).
SMPTE 372M Dual-Link formats supported, with 16 (mono) channels of Audio processed. Processed
Video/Audio data exits the board as a single 3Gb/s stream.
Non-PCM Audio data (Dolby-E or Dolby-D) is not processed by the Audio Synchronizer / Audio Delay
/ Audio ProcAmp processing blocks. If it originated from 'embedded audio', it is passed alongside the active video content through the Video Frame Synchronizer memory and a frame's worth of non-
PCM data is dropped or repeated - together with the active video content every time the Video
Frame Synchronizer drops or repeats a frame.
Quiet Audio Switching
Switching between two sources of the same data- and frame-rate in the serial domain, e.g. on a router’s crosspoint board, can cause momentary discontinuities in the SDI stream. It doesn't matter whether the two sources are asynchronous or not, a temporary glitch in the resulting SDI stream can cause downstream equipment to generate an erroneous output.
The Output module can absorb such glitches and will provide not only a continuous and uninterrupted stream of video, it will also handle the transitioning of embedded Audio from one source to another in a
‘quiet’ manner. In order to accomplish that, the following conditions must be met:
The two video sources, that get switched upstream, must be of the same data- and frame-rate. They can be asynchronous with respect to each other and with respect to the reference signal that is applied to the board.
The channel that is supposed to produce a clean and quiet output must be operated in Frame Sync mode (Frame Sync license is required).
ADS Clean must be turned on.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 154
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Note: ADS Clean ON will wipe out any embedded non-PCM audio data, such as Dolby-E. If a quiet audio transition between two sources, which contain a mix of PCM and non-PCM audio data, is desired, it is recommended to bring in the non-PCM data via TDM.
PX-HSRMX-OBG Specifications
Electrical Output (Back Module with 16 HD-BNCs)
Items
Number of Outputs
Connector
Impedance
ASI (270 Mb/s)
SD SDI (270 Mb/s)
Format
Return Loss
HD SDI (1.5 Gb/s)
Format and Image Sample Structure
Return Loss
HD SDI (3 Gb/s)
Format and Image Sample Structure
Return Loss
Specification
16 (HD-BNC)
Amphenol HD-BNC
75 ohms
SMPTE 259M
525i59.94, 625i50
> 15 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz
SMPTE 292M
SMPTE274M (1080i, 1080psF, 1080p)
SMPTE296M (720p)
> 15 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
SMPTE 424M
SMPTE 425M Level A
SMPTE 372M
> 15 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
> 10 dB (typical) from 1485 MHz to 2970 MHz
Electrical Output (Back Module with DensiShield)
Item
Number of Outputs
Connector
Impedance
Amplitude
Supported Cable Type
Supported Cable Length
Formats
Specification
8
FCI DensiShield
100 ohms differential
800 mV differenial
FCI 10116746-R0600BULF
6m
ASI, SD SDI, HD SDI, 3G SDI
Optical Output (Fiber Back Modules with SFPs)
Item
Number of Outputs
Specification
16
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 155
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
Package
Connector
Wavelengths
Output Power
Supported Video rates
Supported Formats and Sampling
Structures
Bit Error Rate
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Specification
Dual Channel Transmitter SFP Modules
LC with PC/UPC polish (single mode fiber)
1310nm, 1550nm (single mode fiber)
-5 dBm min, 0 dBm max (Gennum GF2922)
270Mb/s, 1.5Gb/s, 3Gb/s
ASI, SD SDI, HD SDI, 3G SDI
Complies with SMPTE 297-2006
Electrical Input (Back Module with DensiShield)
Item
Number of Inputs
Connector
Impedance
Amplitude
Supported Cable Type
Supported Cable Length
Formats
Specification
8
FCI DensiShield
100 ohms differential
800 mV differenial
FCI 10116746-R0600BULF
6m
ASI, SD SDI, HD SDI, 3G SDI
Note: Gennum is the supported SFP for all Platinum Framesync Optical Modules.
PX-HSRMX-OBG Operation
Power-Up Sequence
Due to the complexity of the board and its parameter list, it takes about 2 minutes after power-cycling a board before it is fully operational.About 10 seconds after power-cycling, a board is ready to detect input signals, but the outputs will not become active until the Resource card has completed uploading the previously used configuration (parameters).
The readiness of the board is reflected by the read-only Control Status parameter. (See General
Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image
The modules maintain a backup image of the last working firmware at all times. In the event of an upgrade failure, the module will revert back to its backup image to maintain operation on the board.
You can verify the version that is currently running on the module by looking at the version parameter
Version (MK20_App_S6_V6). See General Parameters (on page 159).
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 156
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Upgrading the firmware on the modules takes approximately 30 minutes. Multiple (identical) boards can be upgraded at once in batches of up to 16 boards (= one 'zone'). A 'batch' upgrade takes about as long as upgrading a single board.
Always wait for the 'Firmware upgrade successful' message before power-cycling the system, exchanging boards, or carrying out any other maintenance work that could interfere with the upgrade process. Do not interrupt the power supply or tamper with a board while an upgrade is in progress. This could corrupt the firmware, necessitating a restart of the upgrade process.
After a successful firmware upgrade, the upgraded board(s) will automatically reboot and will start unpacking the newly installed firmware components. This process can take up to 2 minutes and should not be interrupted. In case the board is removed from the frame or a power outage happens whilst the board is preparing the newly installed firmware, it will retry as soon as the board is plugged back into the frame or power is resumed.
LED Indicators
LED Indicators on the board signal the following:
Power Good
Power On Self Test Passed
Temperature Alarm
Communication Activity
SDI Signal Presence (8 LEDs, 1 per output)
Status LEDs for Status and Diagnostics
Jumpers and DIP Switches
This module has no user configurable jumpers.
The two DIP Switches, labeled SW1 and SWC2, must remain in their factory set default positions - OFF.
Failsafe Module Upgrade
The Flash Memory can be partially or entirely upgraded through the PIPE interface. In case of upgrade issues due to power failures or system instability during upgrade, the last known good working version is automatically reverted to.
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption is 75 watts when all 16 fiber outputs are running at 3 Gb/s.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 157
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Diagram
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
PT-HSRMX-OBG / PX-HSRMX-OBG Data Flow (firmware version 2.1 or higher)
Processing FPGA
– one channel shown
DDR2
Memory
SDI In
(from Wideband XPT)
SDI Rx
Deserializer
Descrambler
Reframer
CRC/EDH Monitoring
SDI Format Detection
ASI Detection
ASI Flag
Pt-/ PX-TDM
128 Channels
Encapsulated Audio data is expected to be synchronous to Video Reference
Audio TDM
Receiver
Video Frame
Synchronizer
*
* requires license key
Clock
Transfer
FIFO
Primary Audio
Demultiplexer
(De-Embedder)
Non-PCM Data
Loss-of-Video
Audio
Fade
Sample Rate
Conversion
PCM
TDM16 Audio to other
Audio Processors in same FPGA
Non-PCM Data
Sample Rate
Conversion
(for Tracking of variable Video delay only)
PCM
DL
B2A
Video
ProcAmp
DL
A2B
Bypass
DL
Demux
Link A Link B
DL
Delay
Test Tone
Generator
Audio
Synchronizer &
Delay
DDR2
Memory
Audio
ProcAmp
Allow embedding if Source (Embedded) is PCM
Allow embedding if Source comes from TDM
Allow embedding if Testtones are enabled
Audio Multiplexer
(Embedder)
DL
Mux
EmbChEn
SDI Tx
CRC Insertion
LineNum Insertion
Scrambler
Serializer
Bypass Mux for ASI
ASI Flag
SDI Out
(to Cable Driver or SFP Tx)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 158
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
PX-HSRMX-OBG Controllable Parameters
The Platinum IP3 Module can be controlled via the Controller. When you access a module (by clicking on it in the list of modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of modules (of that type) in the frame is also displayed on the left.
General Parameters
Name
Physical Info > Temperature
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Description
Indicates the temperature of the FPGA
Physical Info >
Fan Status
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Serial Number
License Key
Licensed Options
Type
RO
Options
<String> in Degrees Celsius
Indicates proper functioning of the module’s fan unit
RO
Displays the module’s unique identifier
Activates the Frame Sync option
Displays activated options
RO
RW
RO
<String>
<String>
<String>
None
Frame Sync
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 159
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Parameter Update Rate
Control Status
Ver (MK20_App_S6_V6)
Module Status
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Description
Defines the rate at which parameters are updated
Type
RW
Reports current Control Status.
Note that the module remains in a 'frozen' state until this status reports 'Ready to Set'.
RO
Lists version numbers of individual firmware components.
RO
Reports current Module Status. RO
Options
Slow
Medium
Fast
Please Wait
Ready to Set
<String>
Module Ready
Firmware Upgrade Required
Module Over Temperature
Genlock Parameters
Name
Sync Select
Genlock Video Present
GenLock Video Locked
Description
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Type Options
RW
Reports the presence of the reference video signal RO
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
No
Yes
Reports the locked status of the reference video signal
RO
No
Yes
GenLock Standard Indicates the video standard detected on the genlock input
RO
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 160
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Processed Outputs
Name
V-Bit Mute Enable
Dolby E Auto Align
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Description
Enables automatic muting of audio outputs when the V-bit is set
Muting on a detected V-Bit applies to PCM audio channels only. Non-PCM audio channels will not be muted.
Type
RW
RW
Options
Yes
No
Yes
No
Video
Processed
Outputs > Video
Name
SDI Video Standard
Signal Presence (1-8)
EDH Present
Description
Displays the SDI video signal standard
Indicates presence of SDI or
ASI signal. ASI signals will automatically bypass all processing stages.
Reports the presence of EDH in the input SDI
RO
Type Options
RO
RO
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080p 50
1080p 59.94
1080p 60
1080p 50 DL
1080p 59.94 DL
1080p 60 DL
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
ASI
Yes
No
Yes
No
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 161
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Output Swing
CRC/EDH Error Counter
CRC/EDH Error Clear
Output Mute
Dolby E Detection
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Description
Sets output swing of SDI signal for passive output combining.
Reports the number of chrominance CRC/EDH errors that have occurred
Clears all CRC/EDH error counters
Type Options
RW
RW
RW
800mV
1600mV
No
Yes
Enables/Disables electrical
(BNC) output.
Allows Dolby E detection based on presence of Dolby E
Header. Can be used with or without PCM/non-PCM
Channel Status Bit correction.
See Dolby E Detection (on
RW
RW
No
Yes
No
Yes
Non-Audio Channel
Status Bit Only
Dolby Header Detection
Dolby Header Detection with Cbit Correction
Audio
Processed
Outputs > Audio
Name
Group Presence
Description
Reports the presence of the specified audio group in the
SDI signal
Type Options
None
Group 1
Group 2
Group 12
Group 3
Group 13
Group 23
Group 123
Group 4
Group 14
Group 24
Group 124
Group 34
Group 134
Group 234
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 162
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
TDM Audio
ADS Clean
Fade Rate
Word Length
Dolby E Start Line (Ln)
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Description Type Options
Enables embedding of Audio
Channels received from the
ATDM board.
Each instance of this control applies to all 16 Mono
Channels of Audio (or 8 Stereo pairs) of an SDI stream. If set to 'Yes', only those TDM channels, which are connected in the Audio crosspoint's matrix, will be embedded into the outgoing
SDI stream.
Disconnected Stereo pairs will be automatically replaced by whatever has been deembedded from the incoming
SDI stream.
RW
Enables and disables the cleaning of the Ancillary Data
Space before embedding audio
Fade rate applies to all 16 audio channels in a video stream
Specifies the audio word length for all 16 channels in a video stream.
See Word Length Parameter
Determines the Dolby-E start line
RW
RW
RW
RW
Yes
No
Yes
No
16 bits
0 - 10 s, in 1 s steps (1s)
20 bits
24 bits
Range is mode specific and complies with Dolby-
E specification
Audio Group
Name Description Type Options
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 163
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Processed
Outputs > Audio
Group
Active Channels
DeEmbed Control
Embedding Mode
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Description
Indicates which channels are active
Specifies the operation of the audio de-embedder when an error occurs; it will either repeat the last audio sample or mute when an error occurs.
See DeEmbed Control (on
RW
Selects the embedding mode for the specified audio group
RW
Type Options
RO
None
CH1
CH2
CH12
CH3
CH13
CH23
CH123
CH4
CH14
CH24
CH124
CH34
CH134
CH234
CH1234
Mute
Repeat
Off
Append
OverWrite
Auto
Audio Channel
Processed
Outputs > Audio
Channel
Name
Embedded Audio Format
Tone
TDM Audio Presence
TDM Audio Format
Channel Delay (ms)
Description
Indicates if the audio channel is PCM or non-PCM audio
Enables Tones
Indicates presence of TDM
Audio Channels
Indicates format of TDM channels (e.g. PCM Audio)
Type Options
RO
RW
RO
RO
PCM
Non-PCM
Off
400 Hz
2 KHz
4 KHz
Yes
No
PCM
Non-PCM
0 - 3000 ms in 1 ms steps Specifies audio delay - per mono channel. See Audio
RW
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 164
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Level Adjust (dB)
Polarity Reversal
Auto Mute
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Description
Adjusts the audio level (gain) for each audio channel
Specifies whether the audio channel should be inverted
Enables muting for the specified output channel
RW
RW
RW
Type Options
-18 dB - 18 dB (0) in 0.1 dB steps
No
Yes
Off
On
Audio Stereo Pair
Processed
Outputs > Audio
Stereo Pair
Name
SRC Control
Delay Track
Summing
Swap/Copy
Loss of TDM Aud Mode
Description
Engages or disengages the sample rate converter
By toggling one of the eight
Reset Toggle A / Reset Toggle
B parameters of the selected
SDI channel instance, Audio
Rd/Wr pointers in the Audio
Synchronizer, affecting all eight Stereo pairs of the selected SDI channel, will be reset.
Specifies whether to sum the audio within a pair
Left to Right - the summed audio is placed in the right channel
Right to Left - the summed audio is placed in the left channel
Both - the summed audio is placed in both left and right channels
Specifies whether to swap or copy the audio within a pair; able to swap left and right channels, copy left channel to the right channel, and copy the right channel to the left
The mode of operation can be selected on a per Stereo Pair basis. Instead of automatically switching back to the associated ‘Embedded’ Audio
Pair in case the TDM gets disconnected in the ATDM matrix, the user can now select ‘Silence’ instead.
RW
RW
RW
Type Options
RW
Auto
Enable
Bypass
Reset Toggle A
Reset Toggle B
Right to left
Left to right
No Swap
Swap
None
Both
Right to left
Left to right
Embedded Audio
Silence
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 165
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Proc Amp
Processed
Outputs > Proc
Amp
Name
Y Gain (dB)
Cb Gain (dB)
Cr Gain (dB)
Y Offset (mV)
Cb Offset (mV)
Cr Offset (mV)
White Clip Enable
White Clip Level (mV)
Black Clip Enable
Black Clip Level (mV)
Hue
Frame Sync
Name
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Description Type Options
Adjusts gain for the Y channel RW -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
Adjusts gain to the Cb color difference component
RW -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
Adjusts gain to the Cr color difference component
RW -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
Adjusts offset for the Y channel
RW ±100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
Adjusts offset for the Cb channel
Adjusts offset for the Cr channel
Controls level clipping according to the White Clip
Level control
Sets the white clip level
Controls level clipping according to the Black Clip
Level control
Sets the black clip level
RW
RW
RW
±100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
±100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
Disable
Enable
RW 636.9 to 763.1 mV (700 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
RW
RW
Adjusts the hue of the incoming digital video signal
RW
Disable
Enable
-47.9 to +47.9 mV (0.0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
-180 to +180° (0°)
Description Type Options
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 166
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Processed
Outputs > Frame
Sync
Name
Horizontal Phase (us)
Vertical Phase (lines)
Frame Offset (frames)
Force Freeze
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Description
Adjusts the horizontal timing
Adjusts the vertical timing
Determines the number of frames the video is offset
Enables video freeze
Type Options
RW
RW
RW
RW
0.000 us to 29.616 us
(1080p 30, 1035i 60)
0.000 us to 14.808 us
(1080p 60, 080p 60 DL)
0.000 us to 29.646 us
(1080p 29, 1080i 59)
0.000 us to 14.823 us
(1080p 59, 1080p 59.94
DL)
0.000 us to 35.542 us
(1080p 25, 1080i 50)
0.000 us to 17.771 us
(1080p 50, 1080p 50 DL)
0.000 us to 37.024 us
(1080p 24, 1080sF 24)
0.000 us to 37.061 us
(1080p 23.98, 1080sF
23.98)
0.000 us to 31.987 us
(1080i 50_295)
0.000 us to 22.209 us
(720p 60)
0.000 us to 22.231 us
(720p 59.94)
0.000 us to 26.653 us
(720p 50)
0.000 us to 44.431 us
(720p 30)
0.000 us to 44.475 us
(720p 29)
0.000 us to 53.320 us
(720p 25)
0.000 us to 63.518 us
(525i 59.94)
0–1124 lines
(1080p/I/sF)
0–1249 lines
(1080i 50 SMPTE 295M)
0–749 lines (720p)
0–524 lines (525i 59.94)
0–624 lines (625i 50)
0 - 17 frames (Delay mode)
0 - 16 frames
(Sync mode)
No
Yes
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 167
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Force Freeze Mode
Loss of Video Mode
Fast Switch
Frame Sync/Mux Mode
Frame Sync/Mux Status
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Description
Specifies the type of freeze, field 1, field 2 or frame
Specifies operation on loss of video, pass, black or freeze.
Enable fast switching
See Fast Video Switch (on
RW
Sets the operational mode of the frame sync delay or sync.
See Video Frame
RW
Type Options
RW
Field 1
Field 2
Frame
RW
Pass
Black
Freeze
No
Yes
Reflects operational mode status based on license, mode of operation, presence, and rate of Reference signal.
RW
FS: Sync Mode
FS: Delay Mode
Mux: Auto Detect
Mux: Always On
Bypass
FS: Ext Lock
FS: Local Lock
FS: Delay Forced
FS: Delay Rate
Mismatch
Unprocessed Outputs
Unprocessed
Outputs
Name
Reclocked Signal Presence
Reclocked Data Rate
Reclocked Output Swing
For Back modules featuring electrical unprocessed
outputs, only.
Description
Reports the presence of the
SDI signal that becomes one of the unprocessed outputs
Reports the data rate of the
SDI signals that becomes one of the unprocessed outputs.
RO
Used to set the output swing.
Default is 800mV.
Type Options
RO
No
Yes
RW
Unknown
SD
HD
3G
800mV
1600mV
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 168
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Reclocked Output Mute
For Back modules featuring electrical unprocessed
outputs, only.
Reclocked Laser Enable
For Back modules featuring optical unprocessed outputs,
only.
Reclocked Laser Status
For Back modules featuring optical unprocessed outputs,
only.
Enables/Disables electrical
(BNC) output.
Enables or disables fiber optical output
Reports laser status
Type Options
RW
No
Yes
RW
RO
Yes
No
Normal
Failed
Disabled
No SFP
Notes:
Word Length Parameter
The Word Length parameter can be set through the Audio section of the GUI to 16, 20, or 24 bits on a per SDI channel basis. 20 bits is the default and is applicable when the video standard is SD SDI
(525/625).
If the SD SDI Video has extended Audio packets (which can apply to any of up to four groups of embedded Audio), Audio data embedded in such group(s) should have a word length of 24 bits. When the processed audio data word length is 20 bits (determined by parameter ‘Word Length' parameter), the Audio Embedder cannot overwrite existing extended Audio packets. There are 2 options in this case:
Turn on ADS Clean (See ADS Clean (1-8) (TABLE PARAMETER)) prior to re-embedding new Audio data, to wipe out any existing Audio packets (regular and extended).
Set the Word Length parameter for the SDI channel in question to match the word length of the
Audio data embedded in the incoming SDI stream.
The Word Length bits for processed Audio data are not auto-detected (based on the detected word length of the embedded Audio data) and set. This is to allow the flexibility for users to steer the word length of the re-embedded Audio data such that it matches the word length of Audio data that originates from a different source (for example, Audio received via TDM).
Fast Video Switch
When input video is switched between two sources while both sources are within vertical blanking, use the Fast Switch (TABLE PARAMETER) parameter to enable fast video switching between the sources. In this mode, output video is not frozen when both sources are within the vertical blanking area when the switch takes place.
DeEmbed Control
The following are options for the DeEmbed Control parameter.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 169
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
Repeat
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Description
Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the de-embedder repeats the last good AES sample.
Mute Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the de-embedder mutes the current outgoing AES sample.
Dolby E Detection
SDI streams originating from 3rd party equipment may not always have the PCM/Non-PCM Channel
Status Bits set correctly when transporting Dolby-E. The PCM/non-PCM Channel Status bit (short ‘Cbit’) is intended to indicate that the embedded AES3 data stream is of non-PCM nature (see also SMPTE
337M).
Dolby E Detection, based on the presence of a Dolby E Header, is an alternative method and should be used in cases where the Cbit is incorrectly set. It is important for the downstream Audio processing to know what type of Audio (linear PCM or non-PCM) it is dealing with in order to not to destroy Dolby E data, for instance, by the sample-rate-conversion process, linear PCM data would normally undergo.
Based on the detected Dolby E Header, an incorrectly set Cbit can be corrected for non-PCM Audio data
(Dolby E) that exits the board via TDM. If the correction is not enabled, a TDM Receiver without Dolby E
Header detection/correction will not be able to identify the audio stream as non-PCM, hence Dolby E data might get destroyed on its path through the Output processing module.
Audio Embedding Modes
Each video channel has an audio embedder component composed of several smaller subcomponent blocks:
One ancillary data stripper (ADS)
Four audio embedding subcomponents
The first subcomponent is an ancillary data stripper (ADS). This block removes all ancillary data packets in the input SDI stream, prior to embedding. Following the ADS block are four separate audioembedding subcomponents. Each subcomponent has the ability to operate on only one audio group, either appending or overwriting a predetermined group onto the SDI stream.
The audio embedding modes are Audio Group (1–4) Embedding Mode parameters.
Embedding Mode Options
Table 79: Embedding Mode Options
Option Description
Append Attempts to insert the audio data and control packets immediately following the last existing audio data/control packet in the horizontal ancillary region. See
Append Embedding (on page 171).
OverWrite Attempts to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of the same
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 170
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Option
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
Description
group number with the new audio data. See OverWrite Embedding (on page
Auto
Off
Attempts first to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of the same audio group number; failing that, it appends the new audio data and control packets immediately following the last existing audio data/control packet (refer to the Audio Group (1–4) Exists parameters to determine what audio groups are already present in the incoming SDI signal).
Disables embedding of audio data and control packets on a per group basis.
Append Embedding
When you select Append embedding, the module attempts to insert the audio data and control packets immediately following the last existing data/control packet in the horizontal ancillary data space (ADS).
Append embedding is only valid if the audio group to be embedded does not already exist.
The following figure shows how append embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is no previous audio or other data.
Figure 72: Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 1 When No Other Data Present
Figure 73:
When auxiliary data exists in the ancillary data space, appended audio appears following that data.
Figure 74: Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 1 When Auxiliary Data Present
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 171
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
If you attempt to insert audio into Group 1 when Group 1 audio data already exists in the ancillary data space, no audio will be embedded.
Figure 75: Append Embedding Mode - Adding Group 1 and a Group 1 Already Exists
If you insert Group 2 audio when there is pre-existing Group 1 audio in the ancillary data space and no
Group 2 audio, the Group 2 audio will be inserted following the Group 1 audio.
Figure 76: Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 2 Following Group 1
If you insert Group 1 audio when there is pre-existing Group 2 audio in the ancillary data space and no
Group 1 audio, the Group 1 audio will be inserted following the Group 2 audio.
Figure 77: Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 2 Following Group 1
An audio group cannot be divided. In Append embedding, the audio group is always added following the last block in the ADS. If there is not enough room to append the audio group following the last block of auxiliary data or audio in the ADS, no audio will be embedded.
Figure 78: Append Embedding Mode Fails to Append When Auxiliary Data Exists in all Audio Groups
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 172
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
OverWrite Embedding
When you select Overwrite embedding, the module attempts to overwrite any existing audio data and control packets of the same group number with the new audio data. This setting is valid only if the audio group to be embedded already exists. If the new sample distribution does not exactly match the existing audio data packet sample distribution, the embedder will mark some audio data packets for deletion
(DID word will be set to 180h).When you attempt Overwrite embedding and there is no previous audio, no audio is embedded because there is nothing to overwrite.
Figure 79: Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is No Pre-existing Audio
The following figure shows how overwrite embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is auxiliary data where Group 1 should be inserted.
Figure 80: Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Auxiliary Data on Group 1
The following figure shows how overwrite embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is pre-existing Group 1 audio. This operation is successful.
Figure 81: Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Group 1 Audio in the Group 1 Space
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 173
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Audio Synchronization
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module
By default, the modules synchronize de-embedded audio with timing information from the video frame synchronizer prior to re-embedding audio. PCM Audio (either from embedded or from TDM), will be automatically delayed to match the video delay. Additionally, up to three seconds of delay can be added through the Channel Delay parameter.
Video Frame Synchronization
The Frame synchronizer offers two modes: Delay mode and Synchronizer (Sync) mode. These modes can be chosen using the Frame Sync / Mux Mode (1-8) parameter.
In Delay mode, the output video is synchronized to the input video.
In Sync mode, the output video is synchronized to the reference video. The reference standard you can use depends on the output video standard set.
Reference
Standard
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 60
720p 59.94
720p 50
Output Video Standard
1080i 59.94
1080p 59.94
1080p 29.97
720p 59.94
525i 59.94
1080p 59.94 DL
1080i 50
1080p 50
1080p 25
720p 50
625i 50
1080p 50 DL
720p 60
1080p 60
720p 59.94
1080p 59.94
720p 50
1080p 50
Reference
Standard
1080i 60
1080p 30
1080i 59.94
1080p 29.97
1080i 50
1080p 25
1080p 24
1080sF 24
1080p 23.98
1080sF 23.98
Output Video
Standard
1080i 60
1080p 60
1080p 30
720p 60
1080p 60 DL
1080i 59.94
1080p 29.97
1080p 59.94
720p 59.94
525i 59.94
1080p 59.94 DL
1080i 50
1080p 50
1080p 25
720p 50
625i 50
1080p 50 DL
1080p 24
1080sF 24
1080p 23.98
1080sF 23.98
In both Sync mode and Delay mode, several controls are available to manipulate the output video signal:
Horizontal Phase - To adjust the horizontal timing.
Vertical Phase - To adjust the vertical timing.
Frame Offset- Adjustable frame delay.
Force Freeze - To manually freeze output video on first or second field (interlaced standards), or on the whole frame (all standards).
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 174
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface
(MADI) Modules
MADI (Serial Multichannel Audio Digital Interface) is an industry-standard electronic communications protocol that defines the data format and electrical characteristics of an interface carrying multiple channels of digital audio. MADI supports multi-channel audio transmission through copper (coaxial) cable or multi mode fiber cable.
MADI is widely used in the audio industry, especially in the professional sector. Its advantages over other audio digital interface protocols and standards are support of a greater number of channels per line.
MADI support enables seamless integration of Audio Consoles and other third party Audio equipment with MADI I/O into the Imagine Communications Audio/Video routing framework. MADI support is offered through the following standard full length boards:
A four channel MADI input board with electrical or optical back module.
A four channel MADI output board with electrical or optical back module
See PT-MADI4X-OBG Output Module on page 284.
Figure 82: MADI Input and Output Modules (and other audio routing options) in a Frame
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 175
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Note: This diagram represents Platinum MADI as well as other audio routing options in the Platinum frame. For details, refer to the relevant modules in the Input Modules and Output Modules chapters of this manual.
MADI Input Module (PT-MADI4X-IBG)
The PT-MADI4C-IBG / PT-MADI4O-IBG input module is an AES10-2008 compliant audio input board that supports three MADI formats: 32 channel (96kHz sample rate) and 56 or 64 channels (48 kHz sample rate).
The PT-MADI4X-IBG is user configurable between one and four inputs, each up to 64 Audio mono channels (32 AES stereo pairs) of PCM Audio. The four MADI input streams can comprise up to 256 mono channels, but a maximum of 128 mono channels can be mapped to the TDM stream. All inputs are converted to a common 48kHz sample rate prior to merging 128 mono channels into a single TDM stream.
Figure 83: PT-MADI4C-IBG Input Module (with electrical back module attached)
Figure 84: PT-MADI4O-IBG Input Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 176
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Variants
Electrical Back Module
The electrical back module is an active back module attached to the front module with two brackets and with Cable Equalizers. The back module has four BNC connectors and stays attached to the front module when pulling the module from the frame. The back module is fully MADI compliant in terms of its electrical characteristics.
Figure 85: PT-MADI4C-IBG electrical back module
Optical Back Module
The optical back module hosts the cages for up to four Dual-Rx Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) Fiber
Optic Receivers. In connection with the PT-MADI-IBG front module, only two of the four ‘cages’ will be used. The back module has to be mounted onto the frame and the Front Module detaches from the
Back Module when the Front Module is pulled out from the frame. One Dual-Rx SFP module is preinstalled. The SFP module complies with the AES10-2008 requirements for optical interfaces. See PT-
MADI4O-IBG Specifications (on page 183) for details.
Figure 86: PT-MADI4O-IBG optical back module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 177
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Controlling the MADI Input Module through the Controller
You can access and control PT-MADI4X-IBG parameters through the Controller by selecting it in the list of modules and then clicking Open Module.
MADI Presence
MADI Presence on each of the four input streams is automatically detected and reported in the MADI
Present section of the MADI Input category.
If MADI is present, the following information is reported:
The number of channels per input stream (32, 56, or 64) along with the sample rate for each stream.
Each MADI input is divided into chunks of 16 channels (1-16, 17-32, 33-48, and 49-64) and these are reported as active or not.
TDM Mapping
Through the PT-MADI4X-IBG parameter interface, channels in MADI inputs can be manually mapped to the TDM stream and you can select if one or all of the MADI inputs contribute to the stream. A maximum of 128 mono channels can be mapped to the TDM stream.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 178
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
The Mapping parameter category provides a MADI to TDM map section in which you can select the channels in each stream to map to the TDM.
For each of the 4 inputs, you can choose whether or not its channels contribute to the TDM stream.
Unused channels in the TDM stream are muted. Mapping from MADI inputs to the TDM stream has a granularity of 32 channels, aligned at 32-channel boundaries. 56 channel formats are treated as 64 channel formats, with the unused uppermost channels always muted.
The following table shows how signals are processed, based on the actual input present and the MADI to
TDM map settings.
If the selected MADI input is not present, associated channels on the TDM bus are muted and marked as inactive.
Table 80: Combinations of MADI to TDM map selections and signal status
Input Status
No input present
No input present
32 channel input
32 channel input
56 channel input
56 channel input
64 channel input
MADI to TDM map
32 channels
56 or 64 channels
32 channels
56 or 64 channels
32 channels
56 or 64 channels
32 channels
Result
32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
All TDM channels are muted and inactive
64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
All TDM channels are muted and inactive
32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
All channels within input signal are passed
64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
Channels within input signal are passed
The uppermost 32 TDM channels are muted and inactive
32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
Channels 1 through 32 of input signal are passed
64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
All channels of input signal are passed
Uppermost 8 TDM channels are muted and inactive
32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
Channels 1 through 32 of input signal are passed
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 179
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
64 channel input 56 channels
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
64 channel input 64 channels
64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
Channels 1 through 56 of input signal are passed
Uppermost 8 TDM channels are muted and inactive
64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
All channels with input signal are passed
Sample MADI to TDM Mapping Scenarios
The following are mapping use cases with different MADI configurations such 32 channel, 56 channel or
64 channel.
Four 32 channel MADI Inputs, all channels mapped (on page 180 )
Four 64 channel MADI Inputs, #1 and #3 mapped (on page 180)
Combination (32/56 channel) MADI Inputs, #3 and #4 mapped (on page 181)
Four 32 channel MADI Inputs, all channels mapped
This example depicts 4 MADI inputs with 32 channel inputs each. Since a total of 128 channels mappings are allowed, all four inputs can be mapped to the TDM.
In the Controller UI:
Open up the MADI Input Module
Go to Mapping in the navigation tree
Set all four MADI to TDM maps to 32
Four 64 channel MADI Inputs, #1 and #3 mapped
In this example, all MADI inputs are 64 channel. Since a total of 128 channels mappings are allowed, a maximum of two inputs can be mapped to the TDM. Inputs from MADI #1 and #3 have been selected for mapping.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 180
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
In the Controller UI:
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Open up the MADI Input Module
Go to Mapping in the navigation tree
Set all MADI Inputs 1 and 3 to 64 in the MADI to TDM Map
Combination (32/56 channel) MADI Inputs, #3 and #4 mapped
This example depicts different channel configurations in the incoming MADI. MADI inputs #1-3 are 32 channel. MADI input #4 is 56 channel. MADI Inputs #3 and #4 have been mapped to the TDM. All other channels are muted.
Other possible mapping scenarios in this situation include:
(1) mapping channels #1-3 (96 channels)
(2) mapping channel #4 (56 channels considered as 64 channels) plus two of three 32 channel inputs (64
channels).
In the Controller UI:
Open up the MADI Input Module
Go to Mapping in the navigation tree
Set all MADI Input 3 to 32 and MADI Input 4 to 56 in the MADI to TDM Map
MADI Audio Formats
MADI sources and/or destinations are typically assigned as either Mono or Stereo format.
For Mono configuration, the default MADI mapping using the Multiplex Mono Audio Device Type can be used, since it maps 128 mono ports by default when inserting/adding logical sources and/or destinations. See below example:
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 181
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Figure 87: MADI - Mono Audio Configuration
For Stereo configuration, and using the Multiplex Stereo Audio Device Type, the Audio channel must be kept at Audio 1 while incrementing the Port number between Left and Right audio channels.
For example, for stereo audio channel 1, ensure the assignments are:
Port 1: Audio 1 (left) and Port 2: Audio 1 (right).
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 182
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
For stereo audio channel 2, ensure the assignments are
Port 3: Audio 1 (left) and Port 4: Audio 1 (right).
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Figure 88: MADI - Stereo Audio Configuration
Input Specifications
PT-MADI4O-IBG Specifications
Table 81: Optical Input Specifications
Item
Number of Inputs
Specification
4
Fiber Type
Package
Multi-mode
2x Dual Channel Receiver SFP modules
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 183
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
Connector
Specification
LC with PC/UPC polish
Wavelength
Receiver Sensitivity
Link rate
Qualified devices
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Wideband, 1250nm-1380nm
-30dBm (PIN Receiver)
125Mbit/s (4B5B encoded, NRZI)
Optoway SPM-3102W-2RG
PT-MADI4C-IBG Specifications
Table 82: Electrical Input Specifications
Item
Number of Inputs
Specification
4
Connector
Impedance
Input Level
Link rate
Return Loss
Equalization
BNC (IEC169-8)
75
150mV to 600mV
125Mbit/s (4B5B encoded, NRZI)
NA
Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 ft (300m), typical, of
Belden 8281 coaxial cable
Input Power Consumption
Power Consumption
Table 83: PT-MADI4C-IBG Power Consumption
Power Consumption 15W
(includes front module and back module)
Power Consumption
Table 84: PT-MADI4O-IBG Power Consumption
Power Consumption 18W
(includes front module and 2 Dual Rx SFPs)
PT-MADI4X-IBG Parameters
Note: SFP Parameters are applicable to the Optical module only.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 184
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PT-MADI4X-IBG Parameters
Functional Block
General
Parameter Name
Serial Number
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
TDM Locking
Temperature
Parameter Hysteresis
Software Version
Control FPGA Version
Processing FPGA Version
Input Type
Sync Select
GenLock Present
GenLock Locked
GenLock Standard
RO
RO
RO
R/W Description
RO
RO
Displays the module's unique identifier
FPGA (V6) temperature
R/W Parameter updated time
RO
R/W
RO
RO
RO
Embedded software version
Control FPGA design version
Processing FPGA design version
Input signal media type
Sync Source
Indicates the GenLock signal present
Genlock is locked
GenLock Standard
Options
<String>
<String> in degrees celsius
<Integer> 2000000 us
<String>
<String>
<String>
BNC
Optical
Sync1
Sync2
Sync3
No
Yes
No
Yes
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
MADI Input
Number of Channels
(Table Parameter)
Number of Channels (1-4) Reports the number of channels in the MADI Input
0
32
56
64
<String> Sample Rate
(Table Parameter)
MADI (1-4) Active
Sample Rate (1-4) R Sample Rate in kHz
MADI<1-4> 01-16 R Bit map for each active channel
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
<String>
June 2016 | Page 185
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block
Channel
Parameter Name
MADI<1-4> 17-32
MADI<1-4> 33-48
MADI<1-4> 49-64
Mapping
MADI to TDM map
(Table Parameter)
MADI to TDM map (1-4)
SFP Type
(Table Parameter)
SRC Bypass
Madi Input (1-4)
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
R
R
R/W Description
R Bit map for each active channel
Bit map for each active channel
Bit map for each active channel
Options
<String>
<String>
<String>
SFP Type <1-2>
Madi Input (1-4)
SFP
Input Optical Power
(Table Parameter)
Input Optical Power <1-4> R
R
R
Indicates how to map MADI signal to TDM
None
32
56
64
Reports Input Optical Power
Reports type of SFP plugged in
Reports the presence of the reference signal
Too Low
Too High
Unknown
-31 dBm to 1 dBm
OP+SFP+MADI+2RX
Unknown
No SFP
Yes
No
MADI Output Module PT-MADI4X-OBG
The PT-MADI4C-OBG / PT-MADI4O-OBG output module is an AES10-2008 (MADI) compliant audio output board that supports two MADI formats: 56 and 64 channels. Audio data is encapsulated into the
MADI transport stream at a sample rate of 48kHz and typically locked to the same Reference as the TDM
Receiver.
The PT-MADI4X-OBG output module can encode up to128 TDM audio channels into up to 4 MADI outputs, with each output capable of up to 64 channels each (or 32 AES stereo pairs) of PCM Audio or non-PCM data, such as Dolby-E or Dolby-D.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 186
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Variants
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Electrical Back Module
The PT-MADI4C-OBG output module has a built-in electrical back module that provides 4 BNC connectors (there are a total of 8 connectors but the last 4 are unused and covered).
Figure 89: PT-MADI4C-OBG Output Module
Optical Back Module
The PT-MADI4O-OBG Optical (Multi-mode Fiber) SFP Back Module is same one used for the MADI
Optical Input Module; break away tabs determine if the back module is to be used as input or output.
The Back Module hosts the cages for up to four Dual-Rx Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) Fiber Optic
Modules (Rx or Tx). Only two of the four ‘cages’ will be used. The back module has to be mounted onto the Platinum frame and the Front Module detaches from the Back Module when the Front Module is pulled out from the frame.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 187
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
The PT-MADI4O-OBG comes pre-fitted with one MADI compliant, Dual-Tx SFP module. See
Specifications (see "PT-MADI4C-OBG Specifications" on page 191) for details.
Figure 90: PT-MADI4O-OBG Output Module
Figure 91: PT-MADI40-OBG Back Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 188
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Controlling the MADI Output Module through the Controller
You can access and control PT-MADI4x-OBG parameters through the Controller by selecting it in the list of Output Modules and then clicking Open Module.
Reference Locking
Reference locking is controlled by the following parameters:
TDM Reference Source in the TDM Locking category
(options are Sync1, Sync2, or Sync3)
MADI Reference source in the MADI Locking category
(options are Sync1, Sync2, Sync3, or Same as TDM Ref.)
By default, audio encapsulated into the MADI transport stream is locked to the same reference as the
TDM receiver.
Using the TDM reference for MADI (default option)
If you select the same reference for MADI as for TDM ("Same as TDM Ref" option), non-PCM data such as Dolby-E or Dolby-D can also be encapsulated into the MADI transport stream.
Using a separate (non-TDM) reference for MADI
If the reference signal for MADI is different than the one used for TDM locking, channels conveying non-
PCM data (such as Dolby-E/D) are destroyed. Non-PCM data becomes unusable because of a samplerate conversion process that transfers received TDM data into a new clock domain (MADI). As a workaround - for example, when you need to lock the TDM data to a video reference - lock the MADI audio data to an unrelated 48kHz DARS reference.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 189
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
TDM Input
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
The TDM Input section reports on audio presence and format for each of the 128 mono audio channels that can be received by the TDM receiver. Possible Audio formats are PCM, non-PCM, Dolby-E, and
Dolby-D.
TDM Output Mapping
You can map portions of the TDM stream to one or more of the four MADI outputs. The MADI Output
Format section provides mapping options for each of the 4 MADI Outputs. You can map predefined channel ranges in chunks of 56 or 64 channels. The following options are available:
TDM 1-56 (56 channels)
TDM 33-88 (56 channels)
TDM 65-120 (56 channels)
TDM 1-64 (64 channels)
TDM 33-96 (64 channels)
TDM 65-128 (64 channels)
Supported TDM Reference/MADI Reference combinations
TDM
Any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates
MADI
Same as TDM Ref. (= DARS Ref.)
Any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates
Any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates
Any of the supported Video Ref.
Standards
Any of the supported Video Ref.
Standards
Any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates (can be unrelated and asynchronous to TDM DARS Ref.)
Any of the supported Video Ref. Standards
Same as TDM Ref. (= Video Ref.) any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 190
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Note: The use of two different Video Ref. Standards (for example, TDM:525 and MADI:625) is not supported.
Supported DARS Ref. Rates are 192kHz, 96kHz, 48kHz, 32kHz.
Supported Video Ref. Standards are 525, 625, HD tri-level sync (various formats).
Output Specifications
Table 85: PT-MADI4C-OBG Specifications
Table 86: Electrical Output Specifications
Item Specification
Number of Outputs 4
Connector
Impedance
Output Level
Link rate
Return Loss
BNC (IEC169-8)
75 Ohm
600mV
125Mbit/s (4B5B encoded, NRZI)
NA
Table 87: PT-MADI4O-OBG Specifications
Table 88: Optical Output Specifications
Item
Number of Outputs
Specification
4
Fiber Type
Package
Connector
Multi-mode (works with 50/125um or 62.5/125um cables)
2x Dual Channel Transmitter SFP Modules
LC with PC/UPC polish
Center Wavelength
Output Power
Distance
Extinction Rate
Link rate
Qualified Devices
Laser Safety
1300nm
-19dBm to -12dBm up to 2000m
8.2dB (min)
125Mbit/s (4B5B encoded, NRZI)
Optoway SPM-3102W-2TG
Class 1 Laser Product
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 191
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Output Power Consumption
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
PT-MADI4O-OBG Power Consumption
Table 89: PT-MADI4O-OBG Power Consumption
Power Consumption 25W
(includes front module and back module - 2x Dual Tx SFPs)
PT-MADI4C-OBG Power Consumption
Table 90: PT-MADI4C-OBG Power Consumption
Power Consumption 22W
(includes front module and back module)
PT-MADI4X-OBG Parameters
Note: SFP Parameters are applicable to the Optical module only.
Table 91: PT-MADI4X-OBG Parameters
Functional Block Parameter Name
General Serial Number
RW
RO
SFP
Submodule Temperature
TDM Error Enable
TDM Error Count RO
Submodule Firmware Version RO
Submodule FPGA Version RO
Wavelength <1-4>
(Table Parameter)
Laser Status <1-4>
(Table Parameter)
RO
RO
Laser Enable <1-4>
(Table Parameter)
SFP Type <1-2>
(Table Parameter)
RO
RW
RW
RO
Description
Displays the module's unique identifier.
Options
<String>
Indicates the temperature of the
FPGA
<String> in Degrees
Celsius
For in-field diagnostics only
For in-field diagnostics only
No
Yes
<TDM Error count>
Indicates MC software version <String>
Indicates FPGA firmware version <String>
Reports wavelength of fiber optical output
Reports laser status
Enables or disables fiber optical output
N/A
1300
Enabled
Disabled
N/A
Normal
Failed
Yes
No
Reports type of SFP plugged in
OP+SFP+MADI+2TX
Unknown
NO SFP
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 192
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Parameter Name
TDM Locking TDM Reference Source
TDM Reference Present
TDM Reference Locked
TDM Reference Standard
MADI Locking MADI Reference Source
MADI Reference Present
MADI Reference Locked
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO
RW
RO
RO
Description
Selects which physical sync port the module uses for the TDM reference
Reports the presence of the reference signal
Reports the locked status of the reference signal
Options
Sync1
Sync2
Sync3
No
Yes
No
Yes
Indicates the reference standard detected on the genlock input.
Reference standards marked with an asterisk can be detected, but they cannot be used in connection with the PT-
MADIxx-OBG, since the output sample rate is always 48kHz.
Selects which physical sync port the module uses for the TDM reference
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
DARS 192kHz
DARS 96kHz
DARS 88.2kHz*
DARS 48kHz
DARS 44.1kHz*
DARS 32kHz*
Sync1
Sync2
Sync3
Same as TDM Ref.
Reports the presence of the reference signal
Reports the locked status of the reference signal
No
Yes
No
Yes
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 193
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Parameter Name
MADI Reference Standard
TDM Input TDM Audio Format (x128)
(Table Parameter)
TDM Audio Present (x128)
(Table Parameter)
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
RW
RO
RO
RO
Description Options
Indicates the reference standard detected on the genlock input.
Reference standards marked with an asterisk can be detected, but they cannot be used in connection with the PT-
MADIxx-OBG, since the output sample rate is always 48kHz.
Indicates the format of each of the 128 Audio mono channels received by the TDM Receiver
Indicates the presence of each of the 128 Audio mono channels received by the TDM Receiver
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
DARS 192kHz
DARS 96kHz
DARS 88.2kHz*
DARS 48kHz
DARS 44.1kHz*
DARS 32kHz*
PCM
Non-PCM
Dolby-E
Dolby-D
No
Yes
MADI Output MADI Output Format (x4) RW Selects which portion of the
TDM stream gets encapsulated into the MADI transport stream.
TDM 1 - 56 (56
Channels)
TDM 33- 88 (56
Channels)
TDM 65- 120 (56
Channels)
TDM 1 - 64 (64
Channels)
TDM 33- 96 (64
Channels)
TDM 65 - 128 (64
Channels)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 194
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Analog/Digital Audio Converter
Modules with TDM
Audio A/D Input Modules with TDM Capability
(PT-ADCT-IB)
Operation
Figure 92: PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Module
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB audio A/D input module provides analog audio to AES digital audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. Two optional builds (one option with High Z inputs, the other with 600
terminated inputs) provide 16 stereo channels of conversion with standard Platinum
I/O module features. This option will provide the user higher conversion capacity (16 stereo channels), made available via Imagine Communications' TDM (Time Division Multiplexing) architecture.
To reduce idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters, audio level sensing circuitry is included that will mute the output (i.e., set all sample data = 0) when the analog input is lost. The level at which input signal presence is determined is user adjustable, and includes a minimal level which effectively disables the function. The duration for which this minimum amplitude is maintained before muting occurs is also user-defined.
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB can automatically detect an external AES reference signal (DARS), to derive the required sampling clocks and generate AES streams that are locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference signal. When this reference signal is absent, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB generates the necessary sampling clocks at one of several of the most common AES frame rates. Users will have the ability to adjust these internally generated sampling clock frequencies within a specified tolerance.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 195
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB
The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-ADCT-IB and PT-ADCT-IB modules. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The optional PT-A2-DTB terminal block adapter is available to accommodate wiring of individual signals to the frame.
Figure 93: PT-A2-DTB Terminal Block Adapter
Analog Inputs
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB provides 16 dual channel balanced analog audio inputs via the PT-A2-BP back module. The standard option provides high impedance inputs; optional 600
terminated inputs are also available. Input signals are received by high-quality, audio line receivers containing internal laser-trimmed, matched resistors for maximum common mode rejection. The signals are converted from balanced to single-ended by the receivers, and are then attenuated and AC-coupled to the second stage attenuators.
Digitally controlled audio attenuators provide users with the ability to set digital full scale to a variety of analog audio levels. These low-noise, low distortion attenuators can be software controlled to provide a wide range of full scale settings.
The output signals from the second stage are then buffered and converted to differential signals in preparation for presentation to the converters, along with a gain adjustment to compensate for the first stage attenuation required prior to the digital attenuators.
The final analog stage provides low-pass filtering and the addition of a DC offset before presenting the audio signal to the A/D converter.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 196
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
A/D Conversion
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Analog-to-digital conversion is provided by quad channel 24-bit oversampling delta-sigma converters supporting sampling frequencies up to 192 kHz. These converters provide DC bias voltage outputs, digital decimation and high pass filtering, and audio input clipping detection.
AES Outputs
The FPGA receives the audio samples from the converters where they are formatted into AES data streams. The FPGA inserts channel status, parity, and CRC bits, and then encodes the data into biphase
AES signals. Two copies of the first eight AES signals are provided as AC coupled LVDS for distribution to the wideband Platinum crosspoints. The FPGA also provides a TDM version of all sixteen AES signals for distribution to the audio-specific crosspoint module(s).
Reporting
Each channel will provide standard reporting of signal presence using card-edge mounted LEDs.
The green signal presence LEDs, labeled "Input 1" to "Input 16," are located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal is detected on its corresponding input.
The red signal clipping LEDs, labeled "Input 1" to "Input 16," are located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude or level adjust available through TDM scales the digital signal beyond AES limits.
In addition, the usual three system LEDs are included.
Operating Modes
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB operates in one of three modes: External, internal, and auto mode:.
In external mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from an external AES reference (DARS).
The resulting AES streams generated from the sampled analog audio inputs will be locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference.
In internal mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from internal oscillators. These oscillators have been chosen to provide for many of the most common AES frame rates (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, and 192 kHz). Voltage-controlled crystal oscillators, or VCXOs, allow adjustment of these internally generated sampling clocks within a specified tolerance.
In auto mode, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB detects whether a usable external reference is present or not. If it is able to lock to the reference, it will operate as described in External mode; however, if the reference is lost or becomes unusable, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB will automatically switch over to operate as described in Internal Mode. If the reference is restored, the board will again automatically switch over to operate as described in External Mode.
Analog Level Detection
Analog input level detection is provided in two forms:
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 197
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
The first implementation is through the use of rectifier and comparator circuits that are used to detect a user-defined minimum signal amplitude. This minimum amplitude is conveyed via a nonvolatile, digitally controlled potentiometer that provides the reference voltage to the comparators. (The reference voltage can be individually set for channels A and B on all inputs.) If the amplitude of the input signal exceeds the comparator reference voltage, the green LED for that channel is illuminated.
If the signal level falls below the minimum threshold for a user-defined time duration, the sampled data output from the A/D converter will be overwritten by all zeroes within the FPGA. This greatly reduces idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters. Conversely, the detection of a signal above the minimum threshold value also has an associated time duration before muting is released, providing hysteresis to this function.
The second implementation of analog level detection is performed in the A/D converter. When the analog level exceeds the digital full-scale capability of the converter, the red Clipping LED for that channel is illuminated, and the condition is reported to the control system. The user has the option of defining whether this condition constitutes an alarm.
Installation
All input modules and back panels are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Control
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the Platinum IP3
Controller.
Controllable Parameters
Table 92: PT-ADCT-IB User-Controllable Parameters
Module
Parameter
Bypass (1-16)
External Reference Frequency
Ext. Reference CRC Error
Description R/W Options
For signals routed to wideband crosspoint only - tells control to make switch regardless of signal presence
RW
Off
On
Reports external reference frequency
(NOTE: Must be a sample rate supported by TDM)
Reports CRC error on external reference
RO
RO
Unlocked
Out of Range
192 kHz
96 kHz
88.2 kHz
48 kHz
44.1 kHz
32 kHz
No
Yes
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 198
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Ext. Reference Lock Error
Ext. Reference Validity Error
Ext. Reference Confidence Error
Ext. Reference Biphase Error
Ext. Reference Parity Error
Operating Mode
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Description R/W Options
Reports lock error on external reference
Reports validity error on external reference
Reports confidence error on external reference
Reports biphase error on external reference
Sets PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB operating mode
RO
RO
RO
RO
Reports parity error on external reference RO
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
RW
Auto
Internal
External
0dBFS setting
Presence Hysteresis (1-16)
Silence Delay (1-16)
Silence Disable (1-8)
Threshold (1-8)
Sample Frequency Adjust
Sampling Frequency Select
Audio Reference
Parameter Hysteresis
Sets 0 dBFS setting for analog to digital conversion
RW 13 dB to 28 dB in 1 dB increments
Sets the time duration between acquisition of signal presence and release of audio muting
RW
7.5 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
Sets time duration between loss of signal presence and audio muting
RW
7.5 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
Disables feature of generating AES silence when signal is not present (wideband mode only)
RW
No
Yes
Sets signal presence threshold (all inputs) RW 0x00 to 0x7F
Adjusts internal mode sampling frequency RW 0x00 to 0xFF
Sets the sampling frequency when in internal mode
Selects AES reference input for source
RW
32 kHz
44.1 kHz
48 kHz
88.2 kHz
96k Hz
192 kHz
RW
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it RW 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 199
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Sync Select
In Level Adjust (1-32)
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Description
Selects one of the four sync inputs as the external reference
Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel
R/W Options
RW
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
RW 10dB to -30dB in 0.5dB increments
Signal Presence (1-16)
Ch. A Presence (1-16)
Ch. B Presence (1-16)
Phase Alarm (1-16)
Clip Detect (1-32)
Polarity Reversal (1-32)
Tone (1-16)
Swap/Copy (1-16)
Summing (1-16)
Crosspoint Type
Reports presence or absence of valid signal (determined by signal presence threshold, signal absence before mute, signal presence before mute release, and tone generation)
RO
No
Yes
Reports absence or presence of a signal on Channel A
Reports absence or presence of a signal on Channel B
Alarm set if left and right channels are out of phase
Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude
Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain
RO
RO
No
Yes
No
Yes
RO
No
Yes
RO
No
Yes
RW
Normal
Invert
Indicates type of tone to send out AES output
Swap/Copy left and right audio channels
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing)
Add left and right audio samples, and then divide by 2
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy)
Determines crosspoint matrix requirement
RW
Pass Input
Silence
500Hz
1K
RW
No Swap
Swap
Left To Right
Right to Left
None
Right to Left
Left to Right
Both
RW
TDM
Wideband
TDM/Wideband
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 200
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Diagram
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Figure 94: PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Functional Block Diagram
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 201
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Pinout Diagram
Table 93: PT-ADCT-IB Pinout Information
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Inputs
1 – 4
1A+
1A-
DB-44
Pin No.
15
30
1A Gnd 44
1B+
1B-
43
28
1B Gnd 42
2A+ 14
2A- 13
2A Gnd 29
2B+ 41
2B- 26
2B Gnd 40
3A+
3A-
12
11
3A Gnd 27
3B+ 24
3B-
3B, 4A
Gnd
4A+
39
25
10
4A- 9
4B+
4B-
23
38
4B Gnd 37
Inputs
5 – 8
5A+
5A-
5A, 6A
Gnd
5B+
5B-
5B Gnd 35
6A+ 6
6A-
6B+
6B-
5
34
19
6B, 7A
Gnd
7A+
36
21
20
4
DB-44
Pin No.
8
7
22
7A-
7B+
3
32
7B- 17
7B Gnd 33
8A+
8A-
1
2
8A, 8B
Gnd
8B+
8B-
18
31
16
Inputs
9 – 12
9A+
9A-
DB-44 Pin
No.
15
30
9A Gnd 44
Inputs
13 – 16
13A+
13A-
13A, 14A
Gnd
9B+
9B-
43
28
13B+
13B-
9B Gnd 42
10A+
10A-
10B+
10B-
10B Gnd
14
13
10A Gnd 29
41
26
40
13B Gnd 35
14A+ 6
14A-
14B+
14B-
5
34
19
14B, 15A
Gnd
15A+
36
21
20
4
DB-44
Pin No.
8
7
22
11A+
11A-
12
11
11A Gnd 27
11B+ 24
11B-
11B, 12A
Gnd
12A+
39
25
10
12A- 9
12B+
12B-
23
38
12B Gnd 37
15A-
15B+
15B- 17
15B Gnd 33
16A+
16A-
16A, 16B
Gnd
16B+
16B-
1
2
3
32
18
31
16
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Note: Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 202
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
Number of inputs
Input type
Input connector
Impedance
Signal type
Maximum input amplitude
Full scale adjustment range
CMRR
Conversion type
Resolution
Sampling rates
Gain stability
Frequency response
Linearity deviation
THD+N
Idle channel noise
Dynamic range
Crosstalk
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Specification
16
Balanced
DB-44
> 20k
Stereo analog audio
+28 dBu
0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in
1 dB steps, ± 0.5 dB
> 75dB rejection @ 60Hz
128x oversampling, 1-bit, delta-sigma
24 bits
32 kHz – 192 kHz using external AES reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, or 192 kHz using internal oscillators
± 0.01 dB
± 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
< ± 0.5 dB typical
< ± 1.0 dB worst case
< 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +23 dBu
< –100 dBFS CCIR-RMS, typical
< –90 dBFS CCIR-RMS, worst case
> 100 dB CCIR-RMS, typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS, worst case
> 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile
(hostile channels driven at
–1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 94: PT-ADCT-IB Analog to Digital Audio Input – 600W Version
Note: Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate
Item
Number of inputs
Specification
16
Input type
Input connector
Impedance
Signal type
Maximum input amplitude
Balanced
DB-44
600
Stereo analog audio
+22 dBm
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 203
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
Full scale adjustment range
CMRR
Conversion type
Resolution
Sampling rates
Gain stability
Frequency response
Linearity deviation
THD+N
Idle channel noise
Dynamic range
Crosstalk
Power Consumption
Table 95: PT-ADCT-IB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 24.7W
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Specification
0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in
1 dB steps, ± 0.5 dB
> 60 dB rejection @ 60Hz
128x oversampling, 1-bit, delta-sigma
24 bits
32 kHz – 192 kHz using external AES reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, or 192 kHz using internal oscillators
± 0.01 dB
± 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
< ± 0.5 dB typical
< ± 1.0 dB worst case
< 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +17 dBm
< –100 dBFS CCIR-RMS, typical
< –90 dBFS CCIR-RMS, worst case
> 100 dB CCIR-RMS typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS worst case
> 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile
(hostile channels driven at
–1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 204
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
AES to Analog Audio Converter Output
Modules with TDM Capability (PT-DACT-OB)
Operation
Figure 95: PT-DACT-OB Module
The PT-DACT-OB audio D/A output module provides the platform for AES digital to analog audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. The TDM option provides 16 channels of conversion with enhanced Platinum I/O module features. The PT-DACT-OB provides greater conversion capacity, made available via Time Division Multiplexing (TDM).
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 205
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-DACT-OB
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-DACT-OB module. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The optional PT-A2-DTB terminal block adapter is available to accommodate wiring of individual signals to the frame.
Figure 96: PT-A2-DTB Terminal Block Adapter
Installation
All output modules and back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing
Input and Output Modules on page 363 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of output modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales
Department.
Control
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the Platinum IP3
Controller.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 206
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Controllable Parameters
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Table 96: PT-DACT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List
Out
Parameter
Tone (1-16)
Polarity Reversal (1-32)
Crosspoint Type
Lock Detect (1-16)
Phase Alarm (1-16)
Clip Detect (1-16)
Audio Mute (1-16)
Swap/Copy (1-16)
Level Adjust (1-32)
Summing (1-16)
Transition (1-16)
Duration (1-16)
Description
Indicates type of tone to send out AES output
Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain
Determines crosspoint matrix requirement
Reports if data is re-locked by reclocking stage
Alarm set if right and left channels are out of phase
Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude
Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage
Swap/Copy left and right audio channels
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing)
R/W Options
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
Pass Input
Silence
500Hz
1K
Normal
Invert
TDM
Wideband
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
On
Off
No Swap
Swap
Left to Right
Right to Left
Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel
Add left and right audio samples, divide by 2
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy)
Determines type of transition on a given destination
Determines transition length
RW
RW
RW
RW
1 0dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB increments
None
Right to Left
Left to Tight
Both
Quiet Switch
V Fade
Fade/Cut
Cut/Fade
Synchronous Switch
No Duration
Shortest
Short
Medium Short
Medium
Medium Long
Long
Longest
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 207
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Module
Parameter
Audio Reference
Parameter Hysteresis
Sync Select
0dBFS Setting
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Description R/W Options
Selects AES reference input for source RW
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it
RW
Selects one of the four sync inputs as the external reference
RW
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Sets 0 dBFS level for digital to analog conversion
RW 13 dB to 28 dB in 1 dB increments
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 208
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Diagram
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Figure 97: PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Functional Block Diagram
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 209
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Pinout Diagram
Table 97: PT-DACT-OB Pinout Information
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Outputs 1
– 4
1A+
1A-
1A Gnd
DB-44 Pin
No.
15
30
44
Outputs 5
– 8
5A+
5A- 7
5A, 6A Gnd 22
DB-44 Pin
No.
8
1B+
1B-
1B Gnd
2A+
2A-
2A Gnd
2B+
2B-
2B Gnd
3A+
3A-
3A Gnd
3B+ 24
3B- 39
3B, 4A Gnd 25
40
12
11
27
4A+
43
28
42
14
13
29
41
26
10
7A+
7A-
7B+
7B-
7B Gnd
8A+
8A-
5B+
5B-
5B Gnd
6A+
6A-
6B+
6B-
34
19
6B, 7A Gnd 20
6
5
36
21
35
4
3
32
17
33
1
2
8A, 8B Gnd 18
Outputs 9
– 12
9A+
9A-
9A Gnd
DB-44 Pin
No.
15
30
44
Outputs 13
– 16
DB-44 Pin
No.
13A+ 8
13A-
13A, 14A
Gnd
7
22
9B+
9B-
9B Gnd
10A+
10A-
10A Gnd 29
10B+ 41
10B- 26
43
28
42
14
13
10B Gnd 40
11A+ 12
11A- 11
11A Gnd 27
11B+
11B-
11B, 12A
Gnd
24
39
25
12A+ 10
13B+ 36
13B- 21
13B Gnd 35
14A+
14A-
6
5
14B+
14B-
14B, 15A
Gnd
34
19
20
15A+
15A-
15B+
15B-
15B Gnd 33
16A+
16A-
1
2
4
3
32
17
18
4A-
4B+
4B-
4B Gnd
9
23
38
37
8B+
8B-
31
16
12A-
12B+
12B-
9
23
38
12B Gnd 37
16A, 16B
Gnd
16B+
16B-
31
16
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 210
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Specifications
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 98: PT-DACT-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output – Standard Version
Item Specification
Number of outputs 16
Output type
Output connector
Impedance
Signal type
Maximum output amplitude
Full scale adjustment range
Balanced
DB-44
66
Stereo analog audio
+28 dBu
0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in 1 dB steps, ± 0.5 dB
DC offset
Conversion type
Resolution
AES frame rates
Gain stability
Frequency response
Linearity deviation
THD+N
Idle channel noise
Dynamic range
Crosstalk
0V ± 0.05V
128x oversampling, fifth-order, delta-sigma
24 bits
32 kHz – 192 kHz
± 0.01 dB
± 0.25 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
< ±0.5 dB
< 0.01% @ 997 Hz,
-1 dBFS = +23 dBu
< -100 dBFS CCIR-RMS
> 100 dB CCIR-RMS
> 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile, typical (hostile channels driven at –1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 99: PT-DACT-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output – 600W Version
Item Specification
Number of outputs 16
Output type
Output connector
Impedance
Signal type
Maximum output amplitude
Balanced
DB-44
600
Stereo analog audio
+22 dBm
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 211
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Full scale adjustment range
DC offset
Conversion type
Resolution
AES frame rates
Gain stability
Frequency response
Linearity deviation
THD+N
Idle channel noise
Dynamic range
Crosstalk
Power Consumption
Table 100: PT-DACT-OB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 14.7W
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in 1 dB steps, ± 0.5 dB
0 V ± 0.05 V
128x oversampling, fifth-order, delta-sigma
24 bits
32 kHz – 192 kHz
± 0.01 dB
± 0.25 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
< ± 0.5 dB
< 0.01% @ 997 Hz,
-1 dBFS = +17 dBm
< -100 dBFS CCIR-RMS
> 100 dB CCIR-RMS
> 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile, typical (hostile channels driven at –1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 212
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM
Capability
AES Balanced/Coaxial Input Modules with
TDM Capability (PT-AEBT-IB/PT-AECT-IB)
Operation
Figure 98: PT-AEBT-IB Module
Figure 99: PT-AECT-IB Module
The AES input front module with TDM capability receives AES3 inputs with amplitude not exceeding 2 V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 75
with the coaxial back module installed, with amplitude
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 213
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability not exceeding 7 V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 110
with the balanced back module installed. The front module recovers, reslices, and amplifies the signal before distributing it to the router’s matrices. This module provides a TDM version of all input signals to be distributed to the audiospecific crosspoint module or, optionally, it can pass the first eight AES inputs to the wideband crosspoint. It allows for the connection of 16 channels of AES digital audio using either a balanced or unbalanced coaxial back module, routed within the Platinum platform. Using the optional 8- or 16channel 110
balanced back module (PT-AEB-IBP), or 8- or 16-channel 75
coaxial unbalanced back module (PT-AEC-IBP), the AES input front module with TDM will accept up to 16 AES digital audio signals. Each of the inputs is presented to separate input buffers, which perform the basic signal recovery and internal conversion to balanced low voltage differential signals (LVDS) for use in the FPGAbased signal presence detection and router distribution circuitry.
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-AEBT-IB/PT-AECT-IB
The PT-AEB-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-AEBT-IB input modules. The PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-AECT-IB input modules. DB-25 connectors are used on both the PT-AEB-IBP and PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-IBP for connection to coaxial cables.
Figure 100: PT-AEC-BOC Cables
Installation
Input Module Installation
All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Back Panel I/O Module Installation
All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 214
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Control
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller.
Controllable Parameters
Table 101: PT-AEBT-IB/PT-AECT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List
[RO] = Read-only parameter
Module
In
Parameter
Back Module Type
Audio Reference
Parameter Hysteresis
Sync Select
Tone (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Polarity Reversal (1-32)
(Table Parameter)
SRC
R/W
RO
Signal Presence (1-16) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
RO
Phase Alarm (1-16) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
Clip Detect (1-32) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
Bypass (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Swap/Copy (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
RO
RO
RO
R/W
Description
Displays the back module type connected to the
PT-AEBT-IB or PT-AECT-IB module
Selects AES reference input for source
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Indicates type of tone to send out AES output
Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain
Enables SRC, if licensed
Reports presence or absence of valid signal
Alarm set if left and right channels are out of phase
Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude
For signals routed to wideband xpt only - tells control to make switch regardless of signal presence
Swap/Copy left and right audio channels
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing)
Options
PT-AEBT-BMI
PT-AECT-BMI
PT-AEB-BMI
PT-AEC-BMI
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Pass Input
Silence
500 Hz
1 KHz
Normal
Invert
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
On
Off
No Swap
Swap
Left To Right
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 215
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter R/W Description
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Options
Right To Left
Out
Level Adjust (1-32)
(Table Parameter)
Summing (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Crosspoint Type
R/W
R/W
R/W
Functional Block Diagram
Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel
Add left and right audio samples, divide by 2
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy)
Determines crosspoint matrix requirement
10 dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB increments
None
Right to Left
Left to Right
Both
TDM/Wideband
Wideband
TDM
Figure 101: PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB/PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB Functional Block Diagram
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 216
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Pinout Diagram
Table 102: PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Pinout Information
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
19
18
17
5
7
6
20
8
10
9
22
21
DB-25
Pin No.
13
12
25
24
23
11
14
2
1
4
3
16
15
J2 (Inputs 1 – 8)
4-
4 Gnd
5+
5-
5 Gnd
6+
6-
6 Gnd
1+
1-
1 Gnd
2+
2-
2 Gnd
3+
3-
3 Gnd
4+
7+
7-
7 Gnd
8+
8-
8 Gnd
Spare Gnd
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
J1 (Inputs 9 – 16)
12-
12 Gnd
13+
13-
13 Gnd
14+
14-
14 Gnd
9+
9-
9 Gnd
10+
10-
10 Gnd
11+
11-
11 Gnd
12+
15+
15-
15 Gnd
16+
16-
16 Gnd
Spare Gnd
19
18
17
5
7
6
20
8
10
9
22
21
DB-25
Pin No.
13
12
25
24
23
11
14
2
1
4
3
16
15
June 2016 | Page 217
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Specifications
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
AES Balanced Digital Audio
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 103: PT-AEBT-IB with PT-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs
Item
Number of inputs
Specification
16
Input type
Input connector
Impedance
Signal type
Input amplitude
Nominal input amplitude
Balanced, transformer coupled
DB-25
110
AES3
AES frame rates 32 kHz to 192 kHz
Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2
Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
0.2 Vpp – 7 Vp-p
5 Vp-p ± 1 V
AES Coaxial Digital Audio
Table 104: PT-AECT-IB with PT-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs
Item
Number of inputs
Specification
16
Input type
Input connector
Impedance
Signal type
Input amplitude
AC coupled
75
BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adapter)
75
AES3id, SMPTE 276M
AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz
Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
0.1Vp-p to 2Vp-p
Nominal input amplitude
Return loss
1.0Vp-p ± 10%
> 30 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz
> 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 218
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Consumption
Table 105: PT-AECT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 2.4W
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
AES Balanced/Coaxial Output Modules with
TDM Capability (PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB)
Operation
Figure 102: PT-AEBT-OB Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 219
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Figure 103: PT-AECT-OB Module
The AES TDM output module allows for the connection of 16 output channels of AES digital audio, using either a balanced or coaxial back module within the Platinum platform, and supports Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) AES routing.
Audio processing functions, as well as signal level conversion and presence detection, are handled within an FPGA-based circuit. The 16-channel TDM output module uses only one high speed LVDS signal to receive the various AES signals for presentation at the outputs.
The AES TDM output module also provides output presence detection and true output monitoring on each of the 16 channels.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 220
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB
The PT-AEB-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-AEBT-OB output module. The PT-AEC-
OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-AECT-OB output module. DB-25 connectors are used on the PT-AEB-OBP and PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-OBP for connection to coaxial cables.
Figure 104: PT-AEC-BOC Cables
Installation
Output Module Installation
All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Back Panel I/O Module Installation
All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Control
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller.
Controllable Parameters
Table 106: PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List
Parameter R/W Description Options
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 221
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Module Back Module Type
Out
Audio Reference
Parameter Hysteresis
Sync Select
Tone (1-16)
Polarity Reversal (1-32)
Crosspoint Type
Disconnect State
Lock Detect (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Phase Alarm (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Clip Detect (1-32) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
Audio Mute (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Swap/Copy (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Level Adjust (1-32)
(Table Parameter)
Summing (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
RO
RO
RO
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Description Options
Reports coax or balanced back module
Selects AES reference input for source
PT-AEBT-BMO
PT-AECT-BMO
PT-AEB-BMO
PT-AEC-BMO
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Sync1
Sync2
Sync3
Sync4
Indicates type of tone to send out AES output
Pass Input
Silence
500 Hz
1 KHz
Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain
Determines crosspoint matrix requirement
Normal
Invert
TDM
Wideband
Select whether to transmit AES silence or a
DC level when signal presence is lost
Reports if data is re-locked by reclocking stage
Silence
DC
No
Yes
Alarm set if right and left channels are out of phase
Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude
Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage
Swap/Copy left and right audio channels
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing)
Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel
Add left and right audio samples, divide by 2
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Off
On
No Swap
Swap
Left To Right
Right to Left
1 0dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB increments
None
Right to Left
Left to Right
Both
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 222
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Transition (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Duration (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
R/W
R/W
Description
Determines type of transition on a given destination
R/W Determines transition length
Options
Quiet Switch
V Fade
Fade/Cut
Cut/Fade
Synchronous Switch
No Duration
Shortest
Short
Medium Short
Medium
Medium Long
Long
Longest
Functional Block Diagram
Input 4C
Input 4D
Input 5A
Input 5B
Input 5C
Input 5D
Input 6A
Input 6B
Input 6C
Input 6D
Input 7A
Input 7B
Input 7C
Input 7D
Input 8A
Input 8B
Input 8C
Input 8D
Input 1A
Input 1B
Input 1C
Input 1D
Input 2A
Input 2B
Input 2C
Input 2D
Input 3A
Input 3B
Input 3C
Input 3D
Input 4A
Input 4B
FPGA-based signal presence detection and internal distribution
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TDM input
AES output 1
Monitor 1
AES output 2
Monitor 2
AES output 3
Monitor 3
AES output 16
Monitor 16
Internal control bus
+24VA in from frame
+24VB in from frame
+5VL in from frame
On-board supply
+5V
+3.3V
+2.5V
+1.2V
Card status and signal presence
LEDs
Back module
ID signals
Control logic
Figure 105: PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB Functional Block Diagram
PIPE
PRTI
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 223
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Pinout Diagram
Table 107: PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB Pinout Information
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
1+
13
1S
25
1-
12
2+
24
2S
11
2-
23
3+
10
3S
22
3-
9
4+
21
4S
8
4-
20
5+
7
5S
19
5-
6
6+
18
6S
5
6-
17
7+
4
7S
16
7-
3
8+
15
8S
2
Spare
1
8-
14
J2 (Outputs 1 – 8)
1+
DB-25
Pin No.
13
5-
5 Gnd
6+
6-
6 Gnd
7+
7-
7 Gnd
8+
8-
8 Gnd
Spare Gnd
3+
3-
3 Gnd
4+
4-
4 Gnd
5+
1-
1 Gnd
2+
2-
2 Gnd
5
4
3
16
6
19
18
17
2
1
15
14
10
9
22
21
20
8
7
12
25
24
23
11
1+
13
1S
25
1-
12
2+
24
2S
11
2-
23
3+
10
3S
22
3-
9
4+
21
4S
8
4-
20
5+
7
5S
19
5-
6
6+
18
6S
5
6-
17
7+
4
7S
16
7-
3
8+
15
8S
2
Spare
1
8-
14
J1 (Outputs 9 – 16)
9+
DB-25
Pin No.
13
13-
13 Gnd
14+
14-
14 Gnd
15+
15-
15 Gnd
16+
16-
16 Gnd
Spare Gnd
9-
9 Gnd
10+
10-
10 Gnd
11+
11-
11 Gnd
12+
12-
12 Gnd
13+
5
4
3
16
6
19
18
17
2
1
15
14
10
9
22
21
20
8
7
12
25
24
23
11
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 224
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Specifications
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 108: PT-AEBT-OB AES Specifications
Item Specification
Number of outputs 16
Output type
Output connector
Impedance
Signal type
Jitter
Output amplitude
DC offset
Rise/fall times
Propagation delay
Balanced, transformer coupled
DB-25
110
AES3
AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz
Other 40% – 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2
Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
< 5ns
5 Vp-p ± 1 V into 110
load
0 V ± 0.05 V
5 ns – 30 ns
< 170 ns
Table 109: PT-AECT-OB Specifications
Item
Number of outputs
Output type
Output connector
Impedance
Signal type
Return loss
Jitter
Output amplitude
DC offset
Rise/Fall times
Propagation delay
Specification
16
Unbalanced
75
BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adapter)
75
AES3id, SMPTE 276M
AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz
Other 40% – 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2
Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
> 35 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz
> 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
< 5 ns
1.0 Vp-p ± 10% into 75
load
0 V ± 0.05 V
30 ns – 44 ns
< 170 ns
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 225
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Consumption
Table 110: PT-AECT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 6.5W
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 226
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules
Analog Composite Video Modules
Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules
(PT-DEC-IB)
Operation
Figure 106: PT-DEC-IB Module
The PT-DEC-IB analog video to SDI decoder input module converts a block of eight composite NTSC or
PAL video signals to high quality, 10-bit serial digital signals (SDI) for routing within the Platinum platform. This module also may be used for "analog to analog" video routing with the optional PM-ENC-
OB or PT-ENC-OB encoder output module.
Hardware Reporting
Each of the eight channels will provide standard reporting of signal presence using a card-edge mounted
LED in each channel for on-site troubleshooting and via the frame control system. These additional system LEDs are available:
Power supply indicator
Control system acknowledgment
Input usage warning
Composite Analog Input Processing
The PT-DEC-IB accepts eight 1 Vpp analog NTSC or PAL video signals terminating into 75
BNC connectors. Using the built-in automatic (AGC) or manual gain settings, the input signal level can be adjusted ±6 dB in each channel to compensate for variances in upstream equipment. As well, each input
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 227
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules is "back-porch" clamped to the proper blanking level prior to conversion in the analog to digital converter (ADC) and offers the ability to handle signals with a luminance pedestal (+7.5 IRE Setup).
Composite Analog to Digital Conversion
Once the analog clamping and level processing has taken place, each channel of video is presented to a
10-bit analog to digital converter, which is phase and frequency locked by an internal PLL. Considering that the desired conversion is to component digital on this card, the analog to digital converters are 2X oversampling at 27MHz (4:2:2 data rate of 13.5MHz times 2). As a benefit of the 2X oversampling, a halfband decimation filter is applied right after the digital conversion to reduce the data rate to 1X the pixel rate, which effectively adds up to 3dB to the overall signal to noise ratio (SNR). Although sampled at a component data rate, the digitized composite signal is band pass filtered into separate luminance and chrominance channels (Y/C). The chrominance channel is sent through a quadrature demodulator for further separation into the base component color difference channels (R - Y / B - Y). As the color demodulation process is likely to cause artifacts in the video, the R - Y and B - Y signals are sent through low-pass filters to reduce those artifacts and achieve optimum bandwidth, and through a five-line adaptive comb filter to compare possible color phase shift issues from line to line. As the next step in the color demodulation process, a color space converter is used to convert the red and blue color components to U and V color difference components (Cr/Cb) as needed for ITU-R 601i and SMPTE-125M type signals.
The RGB to YUV color space conversion is defined in the following system of equations:
Y = 0.299R + 0.587G + 0.114B
U = -0.172R - 0.339G + 0.511B + 512
V = 0.511R - 0.428G - 0.083B + 512
In cases where the U/V bandwidth needs to be limited, as to prevent aliasing or chrominance crosstalk, a set of user-adjustable notch filters is provided. Although more of an issue in the companion encoder / digital to analog (DAC) cards, careful attention has to be paid to the implementation of these filters as a trade-off between frequency response and out of band noise is often encountered. In the interest of keeping the luminance or Y signal bandwidth, a peaking filter is available to the user. There are also controls for the user to set the brightness, contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and hue of the incoming video signal. Once the chrominance signals have been processed, they are reunited with the luminance (Y) channel to complete the 10-bit YUV component digital signal.
Component Digital Packaging
The parallel 10-bit component output of the ADC conversion is presented to the next process, where it is packaged with the digitized sync information and given the proper start of active video (SAV) and end of active video (EAV) headers for a SMPTE-125M compliant parallel output signal. Along with the parallel
10-bit video signal, a 27 MHz clock signal is provided for latching the data words in the downstream serializer device.
Parallel to Serial Converter
The parallel 10-bit video and clock signal are presented to the FPGA-based serializer for conversion to
SMPTE-259C serial digital component video at 270 Mb/s. The 10-bit parallel word is latched into the
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 228
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules serializer on the rising edge of the accompanying 27 MHz clock signal and serialized at 10 times the data rate (270 MB/s). As the serial data is used to clock downstream devices, the serial signal is scrambled and encoded using a non-return to zero (NRZI) algorithm to ensure that clock transitions occur during long periods of all 1s or 0s to keep the receiving PLLs locked.
The NRZI / scramble polynomial is defined as
G1 (X) = X
9
+ X
4
+ 1 and G2 (X) = X + 1
The completed NRZI serial signal is buffered into two copies of itself for distribution to the crosspoint module(s) within the frame.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB
The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-DEC-IB module.
Installation
Input Module Installation
All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Back Panel I/O Module Installation
All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Control
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller.
Controllable Parameters
Table 111: PT-DEC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List
Module
Parameter
Parameter Hysteresis
R/W Description
Sync Select
R/W Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it
R/W Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
In
Signal Presence (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Video Standard (1-8)
RO
Reports presence or absence of valid input signal
R/W Sets video standard
Options
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
(1 s)
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Off
On
Auto
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 229
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
(Table Parameter)
Pedestal Enable (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Luminance Filter Type (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Brightness (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Contrast (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Chrominance Saturation (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Chrominance Hue (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Chrominance Adaptive Comb Filter
(1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Wideband Chrominance Lowpass
Filter (1-8)
Chrominance Notch Filter (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Bypass (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Video Level Range (1-8)
Analog Composite Video Modules
R/W
R/W When Enabled, removes 7.5 IRE video setup level; when Disabled, leaves the incoming signal level as is
R/W Enables or disables luminance adaptive comb filter type
R/W
Description
Sets brightness level
Options
NTSC
PAL B
PAL M
Combination PAL N
NTSC 4.43
SECAM
PAL 60
Enable
Disable
Adaptive Comb Filter
Trap Filter
No Filters
0 - 255 (128)
R/W Sets contrast level
R/W Sets chrominance saturation level 0 - 255 (128)
R/W Sets chrominance hue level
R/W Enables chrominance adaptive comb filter
R/W Color lowpass filter selection
R/W Color notch filter selection
R/W
R/W
Bypasses Platinum auto crosspoint mute if signal is not present
0 - 255 (128)
–180° to +180° (0°)
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disabled
Notch 1
Notch 2
Notch 3
No
Yes
Limited
Full
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 230
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Diagram
Local
I2C
Analog Composite Video Modules
Bidirectional frame control signals
Local
I2C
ENET
PIPE
Control
Logic
Card health and signal presence LEDs
Power from frame
Power failure monitoring
+24VA
+24VB
On-board supply
+5 V
-5 V
+3.3 V
+2.5 V
+1.8 V
+1.5 V
Figure 107: PT-DEC-IB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 112: PT-DEC-IB Specifications
Item
Number of inputs
Input connector
Specification
8
75
BNC per IEC 169-8
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 231
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
Impedance
Signal type
Input coupling
Maximum input amplitude
Nominal input amplitude
Return loss
Clamping
Quantization
Filter
Output data rate
Frequency response
Differential gain
Differential phase
Signal to noise ratio
Bulk delay
Power Consumption
Table 113: PT-DEC-IB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 13W
Analog Composite Video Modules
Specification
75
NTSC, PAL
DC coupled
2.0 Vpp
1.0 Vp-p + 10%
Better than 40 dB, DC to 5.75 MHz
Automatic
10 bits
Five line adaptive comb, notch, or trap
270 Mb/s per SMPTE 259C
± 0.1 dB to 5.75 MHz
< 1%
< 1°
> 65 dB
< 80
s typically
SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules (PT-ENC-
OB)
Operation
The PT-ENC-OB is a SD-to-analog video encoder output module that converts a block of eight serial SD digital signals to composite NTSC or PAL video signals.
The PT-ENC-OB module accepts 32 serial digital (SD) video signals from the crosspoint module, which are presented to four FPGA-based deserializer chips. Within each of the deserializer chips are two 4×1 multiplexers that switch the signals to the receiver blocks.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 232
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules
The two receiver blocks within each of the deserializer chips perform the functions of extracting and locking all conversion functions to the bit-serial clock. To do this they:
Use the internal and external PLL circuitry to descramble the SMPTE non-return to zero (NRZI) SDI stream
Find the "x3FF" start of active video/end of active video (EAV / SAV) frame boundaries
Load the decoded data stream into a "serial in/parallel out" (SIPO) shift register for exporting the data in 10-bit parallel form
The 10-bit parallel data is loaded into the encoder chip on the rising edge of a 27 MHz pipeline clock, where it is processed for digital noise reduction (DNR) to reduce low-amplitude, high-frequency noise.
Gamma correction, sub-alias filtering (SAF), and user-based color adjustments are performed in the
"parallel CCIR-601" domain. The signal is then separated into its chrominance and luminance components, sent through the low-pass filters (LPF) to reduce aliasing effects incurred as a process of encoding the signal, and resampled at 2X to further reduce aliasing. The oversampled parallel signal is finally converted to analog composite video within the 10-bit DAC stage, sent through a 4-pole low pass filter, and buffered for presentation to the output BNC connector.
Through the control system, you can control the low-pass and notch filter selection, NTSC or PAL video standard, video pedestal, internal test signal generator, chrominance level and hue (NTSC only), brightness, sharpness, and digital noise reduction.
You must be careful when implementing the notch and low pass filters, as a "tradeoff" between frequency response and out of band noise often takes place.
Each of the eight channels provide standard reporting of signal presence via card-edge mounted LEDs
(Output 1 – Output 8) and via the control system. Additional system LEDs indicate the following:
The power supply indicator (POWER) shows that +24V is present on the module.
The control system acknowledgment indicator (ACT CTRL) shows that the control system is communicating with the module.
The Output Active warning indicator (ACT OUT) indicates that a valid input signal has been switched to an output on this module.
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-ENC-OB
The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the module.
Output Monitoring Module
The optional PT-HSRAEC-OM module provides output monitoring for the PT-ENC-OB.
Installation
Output Module Installation
All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 233
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Back Panel I/O Module Installation
Analog Composite Video Modules
All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Output Monitoring Module Installation
All output monitoring modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Control
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller.
Controllable Parameters
Table 114: PT-ENC-OB User-Controllable Parameters List
Module
Out
Parameter
Board Level Hysteresis
Sync Type
Video Standard (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Chroma Filter (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Luma Filter (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Pedestal Enable (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
DNR (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
RW Description Options
R/W Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it.
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
R/W Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Sync1
Sync2
Sync3
Sync4
R/W
R/W
Sets video standard
Sets chrominance filter type
NTSC
PAL-B/D/G/H/I
PAL-N
1.3 MHz
.65 MHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
Reserved
CIF
QCIF
3 MHz
R/W Enables or disables luminance filter type
Lowpass
Notch
Extended
CIF
QCIF
R/W
R/W
Enables 7.5 IRE video setup level
Enables or disables digital noise reduction
Yes
No
Yes
No
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 234
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Brightness (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Contrast (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Chrominance Saturation (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Lock Detect (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Mute (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Analog Composite Video Modules
RW Description
R/W Sets brightness level
R/W Sets contrast level
R/W Sets chrominance saturation level
R/W Reports presence or absence of valid signal
R/W
Options
–7 to 22
0-192
0-1255
No
Yes
On
Off
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 235
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Diagram
Analog Composite Video Modules
Figure 108: PT-ENC-OB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 236
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 115: PT-ENC-OB Specifications
Item
Number of outputs
Output connector
Impedance
Specification
8
75
BNC per IEC 169-8
75
Signal type NTSC, PAL
Output amplitude
Return loss
Filtering
Resolution
Frequency response
Differential gain
Differential phase
Bulk delay
Signal to noise ratio (RMS)
DC offset
1.0Vp-p ± 10%
> 40 dB, DC to 5.75 MHz
CCIR-601 compliant
10 bits
± 0.05 dB to 5.2 MHz
< 0.8%
< 0.6
< 80
s
> 65 dB unified - weighting
0 V ± 0.025 V
Power Consumption
Table 116: PT-ENC-OB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 10W
Analog Composite Video Modules
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 237
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Platinum SX Hybrid Multiviewer Modules
Platinum SX Hybrid Multiviewer
Modules
Platinum™ SX Hybrid is 4-slot hybrid multiviewer (output) module for the Platinum IP3 router. It can display router input sources, selectable from a wide variety of input modules: auto-detecting
1080p/HD/SD video with embedded audio, analog video, and graphics input as well as discrete analog or
AES audio. It provides 32 baseband inputs x 2 displays (or 4 via HD-SDI), IP decode, remote desktop control over VNC, and advanced graphical processing capabilities.
Figure 109: Platinum SX Hybrid Output Module
The output module occupies four slots in the output section of any Platinum IP3 frame. It is a self contained unit and is shipped as a complete unit, you do not need to install individual components. The multiviewer’s main components are:
Front view
Installation guides
Interconnect area
Back module connector
The output module front has the ejector/locking mechanism and provides access to the multiviewer’s serviceable components.
Installation guides on both sides of the output module guide the unit when it is installed in a Platinum IP3 frame.
This area provides connectivity to the router frame’s MI module. Input signals from the router’s crosspoint modules are routed to the output module through this connection.
The back module provides all the connectors for external device connections.
Each output module can output two DVI and four SDI video output signals that drive the multiviewer output displays. The Platinum SX Hybrid supports all critical display resolutions up to 1900×1200 dpi, and the DVI outputs can be set for any of the supported resolutions. You can select between two output
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 238
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Platinum SX Hybrid Multiviewer Modules display modes and portrait or landscape orientation to best utilize your output display devices. The
Platinum SX Hybrid also allows custom resolutions, for example 1080×1100. The module only handles
1.5G signals when used in an IP3 frame.
Video inputs are routed from the router’s crosspoint modules to the inputs of the output module. The module receives up to 32 baseband video signals or 24 scaled video channels from the frame’s crosspoint matrix module. In addition to the multiviewer’s outputs, connectors are provided for two
Ethernet connections, a linear timecode input, four USB ports, and AES outputs for audio monitoring.
When making connections from external devices to the multiviewer, it is important to properly secure the cables to your equipment rack. Use cable ties to secure the various device cables to your equipment rack so that the rack supports the weight of the cables. Failure to do so will cause excessive weight on the back module and breakout module connections and connector pins, which may permanently damage your system. A series of fans maintains optimal operating temperature inside the output module.
Platinum SX Hybrid Modules in 15/28 RU
Frames
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 239
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Platinum SX Hybrid Multiviewer Modules
The number of multiviewer modules that you can install in Platinum IP3 router is determined by the size of the router frame. This table lists the number of supported output modules that can be installed in
15RU and 28RU Platinum IP3 router frames.
Table 117: Number of Installed Output Modules in Platinum IP3 Frames
IP3
Frame
Size
15RU
Max. Number of
Installed Output
Modules
8
Number of
Input
Channels
256
Number of
DVI Outputs
16
Number of
SDI Outputs
32
28RU 16 512 32 64
Your sales representative can tell you whether you have sufficient power supplies installed in the frame to power the installed modules.
This table provides information about the number of embedded, discrete analog, and discrete AES audio inputs that are supported when the multiviewer is installed in15RU and 28RU Platinum IP3 frames.
Table 118: Audio Configurations
Audio Input Type
Embedded Channels
15RU (32 Slots)
128 per module
4096 per frame
Discrete Analog
(stereo/mono)
16/32 per module
512/1024 per frame
Discrete AES
(balanced/unbalanced)
16 per module
512 per frame
28RU (64 Slots)
128 per module
8192 per frame
16/32 per module
1024/2048 per frame
16 per module
1024 per frame
Platinum SX Hybrid Back Module
The multiviewer’s back module is connected to the rear of the router frame and provides connectors for output video signals, communication devices, and external devices. To install the back module:
1. Remove any currently installed output back modules from the appropriate four slots (per output module) where you want to install the back module.
2. Remove the blank covers or output module back connector of the appropriate four slots (per output module) on the rear of the frame (a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver is required).
3. Carefully align and then attach the back module over the empty slots using the captive screws.
Do not discard the screws, as you will need them again. Do not tighten down the screws completely when installing the back module. First, install the output module, and then tighten the back module screws.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 240
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Platinum SX Hybrid Multiviewer Modules
The Multiviewer’s back module provides two DVI and four HD/SD-SDI output connections. You must configure the multiviewer to display either two DVI or four SDI outputs. You cannot send layouts to the
DVI and SDI outputs simultaneously.
Inserting Platinum SX Hybrid Modules into a
Frame
CAUTION
Before you install the output module, ensure you properly align the module with the appropriate guide notches in the router frame. Failure to do so may damage the pin connections between the back and output modules.
Output modules can be installed without powering down your Platinum IP3 router frame. Output modules are hot-swappable, and they do not need to be installed next to each other. However, keep in mind that the slots you select to install the multiviewer may affect how efficiently you can populate other output slots in the router.
1. If you have not done so already, remove any currently installed output modules from the appropriate four slots (per output module) where you want to install the output module.
2. Open the I/O Guide door.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 241
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Platinum SX Hybrid Multiviewer Modules
3. Align the installation guides on the left and right sides of the back module with the guide notches of the appropriate slots in the frame.
4. Pull and hold the back module’s extractor handle, and then slide the back module assembly into the frame until it is fully seated.
5. Let go of the extractor handle and push it into the locking position.
6. Close the I/O Guide door.
Configuring the Platinum SX Hybrid Module
Please refer to the Platinum SX Hybrid Installation and Operation User Manual and the Platinum SX
Hybrid Designer User manual.
See the Platinum IP3 Controller User Manual (accessible from the Controller Web UI) for database configuration information.
Platinum SX Pro Multiviewer Modules
Please refer to the Platinum SX Pro Multiviewer User Manual.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 242
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
1500 Watt Power Supply and
External Power Supply Frame
See Power Supplies (PX-PS) (on page 243 ) for information on the Power Supplies that come with the
PX-FR-28 or PX-FR-15 frame
See External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) (on page 245) for information on the optional Power
Supply Frames
See Power Distribution Modules (on page 255) for information on Power Distribution Modules that
interface between the power supplies and the PX-FR-EXPS
See Installing Power Supplies (on page 249) for Power Supply Installation information
Power Supplies (PX-PS)
The PX-PS Power Supply provides up to 1500W of power.
Figure 110: PX-PS (R-1500) Power Supply
There are four LEDs on the front of the power supply: 5V, 24V, AC, and FAN, which are used to indicate failure on the DC and AC power rails or Fan failure.
Note: The Power Supplies are hot-pluggable.
Power Supply Modes
The Power Switch on the front of the power supply puts the power supply into Standby mode or ON mode.
In Standby mode, the power supply is energized internally but not driving power into the frame.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 243
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
In ON mode, the power supply is supplying power to frame.
Once an AC power cord is attached to a power supply, its becomes energized (partially operational internally).
Power Supplies in a 28 RU Frame
The 28 RU IP3 Frame (PX-FR-28) comes with 4 Power Supplies (PX-PS) - 2 at the top of the frame (at each corner) and 2 at the bottom of the frame (at each corner). See Installing Power Supplies (on page
249) for instructions on installing additional power supplies.
Figure 111: Power Supplies at the top of a 28 RU IP3 Frame
Figure 112: Power Supplies at the bottom of a 28 RU IP3 Frame
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 244
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Power Supplies in a 15 RU Frame
The 15 RU IP3 Frame (PX-FR-15) comes with up to 4 Power Supplies (PX-PS) - all 4 at the top of the
frame. See Installing Power Supplies (on page 249) for instructions on installing additional power
supplies.
Power Supply 1 Optional
Optional Power Supply 2
External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS)
Additional power (if required) is available via a separate External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) that contains the following:
PX-PD-TOP power distribution board
4 adapter boards
Note: The PX-FR-EXPS does not come with any Power Supplies. These have to be purchased and
installed separately. See Installing Power Supplies (on page 249).
The PX-FR-EXPS External Power Supply Frame is connected to the PX-FR-28 or PX-FR-15 IP3 frame using four DC power cables: 165-100036Q00 (24") or 165-100037Q00 (90").
You can have up to 2 External Power Supply frames connected to a 28 RU IP3 frame, installed either both above the frame, or one above and below the Frame - dependent on the length of the cables
(24" or 90") used to connect the PX-FR-EXPS to the PX-FR-28.
You can have 1 External Power Supply frame connected to a 15 RU IP3 frame, installed above the frame.
Note: To simplify field upgrade and the manufacturability of the power section, the External Power
Supply connectors are located directly on the rear of the frame (with a plastic cover when not in use). To accomplish this, a separate module is used to interconnect the MI (power distribution section) to the rear metalwork with a card edge on one side and a right angle connector on the other (with retention to the metalwork).
Required Equipment
Note: In order to minimize the risk of damage to components, the IP3 frame must be powered down during PX-FR-EXPS installation. This unit contains Electro Static Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) devices, recognized handling precautions should be observed.
One Platinum IP3 Frame (PX-FR-28 or PX-FR-15)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 245
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Two PX-FR-EXPS (for PX-FR-28) or one PX-FR-EXPS (for PX-FR-15)
One Flash light
Screw Drivers and other hand tools
Power Cables
The PX-FR-28/PX-FR-15 IP3 frames do not need to be specifically configured for the PX-FR-EXPS external power supplies. 24" or 90" DC power cables must be connected between the IP3 frame and PX-FR-EXPS frames. AC Power Cords also need to be connected between the IP3 Frame and the External Power
Supply Frame.
24" Male to Male Combination D-Sub (165-100036Q00)
Standard length cable that connects the PX-FR-28/PX-FR-15 Frame to the PX-FR-EXPS.
Note: Four 24"cables are included when you buy the PX-FR-EXPS frame.
24" cables are recommended to minimize power loss in the system.
If 24" cables are used to connect the PX-FR-EXPS to a PX-FR-28, one PX-FR-EXPS unit must be installed above and one below the PX-FR-28.
In case of a PX-FR-15, only a single PX-FR-EXPS unit can be installed, above the frame
90" Male to Male Combination D-Sub (165-100037Q00)
90" cables are a customer orderable option.
If 90" cables are used to connect the PX-FR-EXPS to a PX-FR-28 frame, both PX-FR-EXPS units can be installed above or below the PX-FR-28.
In case of a PX-FR-15, the PX-FR-EXPS must be installed on top of the frame
Power Cable Installation Steps (for PX-FR-EXPS to PX-FR-
28/PX-FR-15)
Note: The following steps consider a 28 RU Frame. Follow the same steps for a 15 RU frame, but note that there can only be one external power supply frame connected, at the top of the 15 RU IP3 Frame.
CAUTION All AC power lines should be disconnected before attaching the Interface (DC power) cables to the rear of the frames.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 246
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Note the orientation of the Combination D-Sub (green) connectors (with gold contacts) on the Rear panel. One is rotated 180 degrees from the other. Keep this in mind when attaching the Interface (DC power) cables.
Figure 113: Rear View of the PX-FR-28 frame showing the D-Sub connectors
1. Mount the PX-FR-EXPS above the PX-FR-28 frame.
2. Connect all four connectors (A,B,C,D) on the PX-FR-EXPS to the corresponding connectors (A,B,C,D) on the PX-FR-28.
Figure 114: PX-FR-EXPS unit mounted above PX-FR-28
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 247
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
3. Attach the Interface (DC power) cables between the PX-FR-28 and PX-FR-EXPS.
Figure 115: DC Power Cables connected between PX-FR-28 and PX-FR-EXPS
4. Secure the DC power cables to the mating Combination D-Sub connector by tightening the screws.
Figure 116: Locking Screws to secure DC Power Cables connected to PX-FR-28
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 248
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
The following figure shows the 90" DC power cables attached to the bottom of the PX-FR-28 frame.
Figure 117: Bottom of PX-FR-28 with 90" DC Cables attached
5. Mount the second PX-FR-EXPS below the PX-FR-28 frame.
6. Repeat the above steps to connect the A,B,C,D connectors on the bottom PX-FR-EXPS to the corresponding connectors on the frame bottom.
Installing Power Supplies
CAUTION: The latch on the Power Supply (PX-PS) must be in the unlocked position (latch on the right side of the slot) before it is slid into the frame. This prevents damage to the frame and latch.
Figure 118: Power Supply with Latch in Unlocked Position
To install a Power Supply:
1. Align a Power Supply (PX-PS) with the slot on the Frame.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 249
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
2. Gently slide the Power Supply (PX-PS) into place; it should snap into the Frame.
Figure 119: Power Supply being inserted into Frame
3. After the Power Supply (PX-PS) is fully inserted into the frame:
Loosen the thumbscrew on the latch of the Power Supply (turn counter-clockwise)
Push the latch on the Power Supply all the way to the left to lock the Power Supply into place
Tighten the thumbscrew (turn clockwise) to lock the latch in place.
Figure 120: Power Supply with Latch in Locked Position
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 250
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Zones
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Power Zones for a 28 RU Frame
In a 28 RU frame, power distribution is split into four separate zones.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 251
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 252
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Power Zones for a 15 RU Frame
In a 15 RU frame, power distribution is split into two separate zones.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 253
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
Power Distribution Zones
The 28 RU Platinum IP3 frame (PX-FR-28) is divided into four 24V Power Zones and two 5V Power Zones, to manage power distribution and loading within the frame. The 15 RU Platinum IP3 Frame (PX-FR-15) is divided into two Zones.
For low power modules such as the PX-HSR9C-IBG or PX-HSR16C-OBG, 2N redundancy can be achieved with a second PX-PS plugged into a Power Zone. For high power modules such as the HV-SXP-16x3 or PT-
FSDMX-IBG, redundancy may require the External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) depending upon the number of modules plugged into that Power Zone.
Each PX-PS has a 24V and 5V output power rail. When a PX-PS is plugged into the IP3 frame or External
Power Supply Frame, its 24V output will connect to one of the four 24V power zones and its 5V output one of the two 5V power zones.
The following table lists the core modules that can be plugged into the frame and which 24V Power
Zone they are connected to.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 254
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 119: Power Distribution Zones
MODULE/COMPONENT
Video Crosspoint 1
15 RU FRAME
ZONE 1 ZONE 2
Video Crosspoint 2
ATDM Crosspoint 1
ATDM Crosspoint 2
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
28 RU FRAME
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
Front Fan Module (Top)
Front Fan Module (Bottom)
Single
Front Fan
Module
Rear Fans (Top 4)
Rear Fans (Bottom 3)
Resource Module 1
N/A N/A
Resource Module 2
Sync Module (Left)
Sync Module (Right)
Alarm Expansion Card
Output Monitoring Card
MODULE/COMPONENT
Video Crosspoint 1
15 RU FRAME
ZONE 1 ZONE 2
28 RU FRAME
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4
Video Crosspoint 2
ATDM Crosspoint 1
ATDM Crosspoint 2
Front Fan Module (Top)
Front Fan Module (Bottom)
Single
Front Fan
Module
Power Distribution Modules
Power Distribution Modules are the interface between PX-PS Power Supplies in the IP3 frame and the
PX-FR-EXPS. Power Distribution Modules are connected to the PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15 MI backplane, eliminating the need for the separate connectors and wiring.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 255
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Top Power Distribution Module (PX-PD-TOP)
The Top Power Distribution Module (PX-PD-TOP) is used both in the PX-FR-28/PX-FR-15 IP3 frames and in the PX-FR-EXPS External Power Supply Frame.
Figure 121: PX-PD-TOP - Power Distribution Module (shown with wires)
DIP Switches on the PX-PD-TOP
There are four DIP switches, SW1 to SW4, on the PX-PD-TOP Top Power Distribution board.
CAUTION: The DIP Switch must be in a specific position depending on whether the PX-PD-TOP is used in the IP3 frame or the PX-FR-EXPS External Power Supply Frame.
When the PX-PD-TOP is used in the PX-FR-EXPS frame, all switch positions should be set to
CLOSED/ON.
When the PX-PD-TOP is used in the IP3 frame, switch positions should be set to OPEN/OFF.
Figure 122: Dip Switches SW1 and SW2 on the PX-PD-TOP when installed in the External Power Supply frame (PX-FR-EXPS)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 256
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Figure 123: Dip Switches SW3 and SW4 on the PX-PD-TOP when installed in the External Power Supply frame (PX-FR-EXPS)
Fuses on the PX-PD-TOP
Figure 124: Fuses on the PX-PD-TOP
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 257
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 120: PX-PD-TOP Fuse Ratings
Fuse Type
Fastblow
Fuse Rating
10 Amps
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Part Number
127-100013Q00
Bottom Power Distribution Module (PX-PD-BOT)
The PX-PD-BOT Bottom Power Distribution Module is used only in the PX-FR-28 frame. It is not used in the External Power Supply PX-FR-EXPS.
Figure 125: PX-PD-BOT - Power Distribution Module
Fuses on the PX-PD-BOT
Table 121: PX-PD-BOT Fuse Ratings
Fuse Type Fuse Rating
Fastblow 10 Amps
Part Number
127-100013Q00
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 258
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Power Supply Specs, LEDs, and Pinouts
Power Supply Mechanical Specification
Table 122: Power Supply Mechanical Specifications
Item Specification
Dimensions 4.5 Inches by 2.6 Inches by 10.25 Inches
Cooling
Mounting
Forced Air Cooled, Front to Back Airflow, Variable Fan Speed Control
Slides into existing cavity in the Platinum IP3 and External Power Supply frames.
Mechanically locks in place.
Field Swappable Fan
Temperature
Humidity
Replaceable Cooling Fan Assembly. Power supply incapable of powering up with cooling fan assembly removed.
Maintains full power at temperatures from 0 to 50 degrees Celsius
0 to 95% Humidity, Non-Condensing
Power Supply Electrical Specification
Table 123: Power Supply Electrical Specifications
Item
Input Voltage
Specification
Universal AC Input (90VAC to 265VAC)
Input Frequency
Power Factor
Correction
47 - 63Hz
>96% Efficient, Active, Meets EN61000-3-2 as a Class A Device when under 50% Load, Max Test Voltage
230VAC
Inrush Current
Power Supply
Efficiency
Output Voltages
Output Currents
Output Fusing
Output Power
Line Regulation
Load Regulation
Output Noise
Overcurrent
Protection
Overvoltage
Protection
Less than or equal to 50 Amps peak at 264VAC
Meets 80Plus Gold Efficiency Standard at Input Voltage of 230VAC. Greater Than 80% Over Input Voltage
Range
V1 = 5VDC, V2 = 24VDC
5VDC @ 10Amps, 24VDC
24VDC Outputs (Pins 3 and 26 of Power Connector) each to be Fused to Prevent Output Current from
Exceeding 40 Amps
1500 Watts (Continuous)
< +/- 0.1%
+/- 2.0% for 24VDC Output, +6.0/-2.0% for 5VDC Output
100mV P-P (20Mhz Bandwidth, Measured across 0.1uF and 10 uF capacitors connected in parallel)
Non-destructively limit current to 110% rated maximum output, Square Current Limit with Automatic
Recovery
Entire power supply shuts down if any output rail reaches 15% above rated voltage
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 259
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
Current Sharing
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Specification
Active, All Outputs, N+1 Hot Swappable (Diode Isolation), 20% Tolerance on Loads greater than 50%,
Current Shares with Present Power Supply Model
Holdup Time
Indicators
Alarms
16 milliseconds at One-Half Maximum Output Power
LEDs indicating 5VDC, 24VDC, and Fan Fail present on front cover. LEDs indicate complete failure of
Voltage Rails, or Fan not operating, or deviation from specified voltages, or Fan speed not nominal
Alarm PCB to monitor both voltage rails and Cooling Fan and make four status signals available at the Main
Connector for Remote Monitoring
I2C Communications Serial communications to provide all parameters listed in Table 2. Reference Table 1 for pin assignments.
R1500 to be configured as Slave device. If CLK or DATA lines are pulled to GND or VCC power supply operation must not be affected
MTBF > 250,000 Hours @ 30 Degrees Celsius (Excludes Fan Life)
Power Supply LED Operation
Figure 126: LEDs on PX-PS
Table 124: Power Supply LED Operation
LED Behavior Condition
5V OFF
Solid AMBER or BLUE
No AC power supplied to the power supply
AC power supplied to the power supply but switch off
Solid GREEN
24V
Flashing RED at 2 Hz
OFF
Solid GREEN
Flashing RED at 2 Hz
5VDC standby voltage is present and good
(NOTE: Only possible when AC power is supplied and power switch is on)
Fault condition on secondary is detected
Power switch is off or AC power is not present
Corresponding 24VDC is present and good
Failure condition detected on the corresponding 24VDC output. Possible causes:
Corresponding 24VDC output is shorted
Over-current on corresponding 24VDC output
Under-voltage on corresponding 24VDC output
Fuse blown on corresponding 24VDC output
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 260
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
LED
FAN
Behavior
OFF
Solid GREEN
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Condition
Power switch is off or AC power is not present
The fan is operating normally
Flashing RED at 2 Hz Fan failure detected
Could also be used to indicate over temperature.
Power Connector Pinout
21
22
24
26
15
18
19
20
27
28
9
10
12
13
3
4
6
8
Table 125: Power Connector Pinout ELCON Model #298-08-01100
Pin
1
Rated
Current
35A
Design Spec
Current
18A
Nomenclature
Line Input
Power Supply Wire
Color
Black
2 35A N/A Neutral White
10A
10A
10A
35A
10A
10A
10A
10A
35A
35A
10A
10A
10A
10A
35A
35A
10A
10A
10mA
10mA
10mA
4A
10mA
10mA
1mA
31A
31A
N/A
31A
31A
10mA
4A
10mA
10mA
10mA
10mA
+24A
-24A
I2C
+5
24 A Fail C
24 A Fail E
5 Fail C
5 Fail E
I2C
Fan Fail C
Fan Fail E
-5
24B Fail C
24B Fail E
Chassis Sense
+24B
-24B
AC Safety Ground
Green
Black
Gray
Black
Red
Orange
Violet
Orange
Green
Green
Red
Green
Orange
Red
Green
Purple
Blue
Brown
Signal
AC Line
AC Return
24V Supply
24V Return
CLK
5V Supply
Opto Collector
Opto Emitter
Opto Collector
Opto Emitter
DATA
Opto Collector
Opto Emitter
5V Return
Opto Collector
Opto Emitter
Power Level Detect
24V Supply
24V Return
AC Ground
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 261
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Figure 127: Connector Pin Numbering
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 262
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN
Modules
The 28 RU Platinum IP3 has two separate PX-FRONT-FAN modules, one at the top of the frame, and one at the bottom (the two modules are mirror- images of each other and are not interchangeable). Each
Front Fan module contains six individual fans. There are seven large fans that exhaust heat from the rear of the frame. The PX-REAR-FAN Rear Fans provide the main cooling for the entire frame (power supplies and modules).
The 15 RU Platinum IP3 has a single PX-FRONT-FAN module that contains six individual fans. There are four large fans on the rear of the frame that provide the main cooling for the entire frame (power supplies and modules).
Front Fan Module
The PX-FRONT-FAN module is hot swappable and its main function is to cool the IP3 Video Crosspoint.
Each PX-FRONT-FAN module contains six 40 mm2 fans. The temperature of the Video Crosspoint module is communicated to the Front Fan modules; the speed of the fans is adjusted to 25%, 50%, or
75% of their full speed based upon the temperature of the Video Crosspoint module. If the Front Fan module detects a fan failure or loss of communication with the Resource module, the other five fans in the array are automatically set to 75% speed. (100% speed does not affect cooling performance.)
CAUTION: Front Fan modules are the main source of cooling for the Video Crosspoint modules. In the event of a fan failure, ensure that you replace the fan as soon as possible to prevent overheating.
Fan failures are indicated by alarms to the Platinum IP3 Controller, and by lit LEDs beside the fans themselves.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 263
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
Six individual front fans with status
LEDs
Top
Front Fan Module
Front Fan Module
Six individual front fans with status LEDs
Top front fan module status LEDs
Bottom front fan module status LEDs
Six individual front fans with status
LEDs
Front Fan
Module
Status LED
Bottom
Front Fan Module
Figure 128: Front Fan Module in a 28 RU Frame Figure 129: Front Fan Module in a 15 RU Frame
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 264
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Failsafe Mode for Front Fans
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
The Front Fan modules have a recessed Reset button located next to the status LEDs. When activated, this button forces the fan module into Failsafe mode. To put the Front Fan module into Failsafe mode for firmware reprogramming, insert a paper clip into the small hole, and then press and hold the button for three seconds. Then use the IP3 Controller to upgrade the firmware on the Front Fan module.
Front Fan LEDs
Table 126: 28 RU - Front Fan Module LEDs
LED
Name
LED
Color
Power Red
Description
Green The module is receiving
24 VDC and 5 VDC power
Off
The 24 VDC power supply is missing.
No power is present on the Front Fan module
ACT
CTRL
Alarm
Level
Major
None
Major
Red Major
Green The Front Fan module is operating normally and communicating with the
Resource module via the
PX-ALARM module.
None
Off
The module has not communicated with the
Resource module (PX-
RES) for 5 seconds, or a power failure has occurred.
The module has lost standby power and is not communicating with the resource module.
Major
Fans 1 to 6
Green The front fan is operating normally
Flashing
Red and
Green
The front fan has failed or is disconnected
Info
Major
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 265
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 127: 15 RU - Front Fan Module LEDs
Status LED for individual fan
Reset Button
Video XP Status
Fan Module Status
Fan Module Power
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
LED Name
Video XPT
Status
Fan Module
Status
LED
Color
Description
Alarm
Level
Orange Video Crosspoint 1 Active Info
Green Video Crosspoint 2 Active Info
Off Both Crosspoints Inactive Info
Major Red The Front Fan module is not communicating with the resource module.
Green The Front Fan module is operating normally
None
Off
Red
The Front Fan module has lost power
Major
A 24V error has occurred Major
Fan Module
Power
Green The Front Fan module is operating normally
Off
None
A 5V error has occurred Major
Fans 1 to 6 Green The fan is operating normally
Flashing
Red and
Green
The fan has failed or is disconnected
None
Major
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 266
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Front Fans Status in the Web UI
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
The Controller Web UI reports Front Fans status in the PX-FRONT-FAN module, accessible by going to the List of Modules > Control Cards and clicking Open Module against PX-FRONT-FAN.
Figure 130: Front Fan Status for a 15 RU Frame
Status is displayed for all 6 front fans; you can view Fan Speed and Fan Failure status.
Rear Fan Module
The 28 RU Platinum IP3 has 7 individual Rear Fans and the 15 RU Frame has 4 individual Rear fans.
The rear fans automatically switch to 75% speed if one of the fans fails, or is disconnected. If either of the Front Fan modules is disconnected from the IP3 frame for a period of time, the Rear Fan speeds will be increased to compensate, to keep the IP3 Video Crosspoint and Data Switch modules cool.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 267
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
Figure 131: 28 RU Front Fans Figure 132: 15 RU Rear Fans
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 268
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Rear Fans Status in the Web UI
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
The Controller Web UI reports Rear Fans status in the PX-ALARM-DATA module, accessible by going to the List of Modules > Control Cards and clicking Open Module against PX-ALARM-DATA.
A 28 RU frame displays status for 7 of its rear fans. A 15 RU frame displays status for its 4 rear fans, and
Fans 5/6/7 will show as N/A. You can see individual fan speed, as well as whether any of the fans have failed.
Figure 133: Rear Fan Status for a 15 RU Frame
Servicing the Fans
The following fan parts can be replaced in the field:
PX-FRONT-FAN array module
Individual front fan units
Individual rear fan units
Replacing a Front Fan Module
To replace a Front Fan module, follow these steps:
1. After opening the front door of the frame, locate the faulty fan module.
2. Loosen the two thumbscrews, and then swing the module to the left.
Figure 134: Front Fan Module Array (Top Module Shown)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 269
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
3. Disconnect the wiring harness by squeezing the white connector tabs together and gently pulling apart the connector.
Figure 135: Unlocking Wire Connector
4. Lift the module up and out of its hinge.
5. Swing open the other fan module array to ease the replacement process.
6. Insert the replacement module.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 270
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
7. Reconnect the wiring harness. (Note: the connector has a key slot)
Figure 136: Wire Connector
8. Swing the module closed, and then tighten the two thumbscrews.
9. Close the other fan array module.
Replacing an Individual Front Fan
To replace an individual front fan, follow these steps:
1. Open the front door of the frame and locate the faulty fan (indicated by a red LED).
2. Remove the two screws in the fan, and unplug the wire harness using tweezers or needle nose pliers.
Figure 137: Removing Individual Front Fan
3. Insert the replacement fan, screw the fan into place, and then re-connect the wire harness.
4. Verify that the fan status LED is lit green.
5. Close the front door of the frame.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 271
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Replacing a Rear Fan
A failed Rear Fan module is indicated by a red LED.
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
Figure 138: Rear Fan LED
To remove and replace a Rear Fan Module, follow these steps:
1. Remove the four captive screws in the corners of the fan unit.
Figure 139: Rear Fan
2. Carefully slide the fan straight out.
3. Confirm the correct orientation of the replacement fan (the electrical connector should be in the bottom left corner), then slide the new fan into position.
4. Secure the Rear Fan module to the frame by tightening the four captive screws.
5. Verify that the Rear Fan status LED is green.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 272
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
CAUTION: The black shutters located behind the fans are necessary to prevent warm air from recirculating back into the frame. Ensure the shutters are not removed.
Fuses
Front and rear fans on the Platinum IP3 are protected by fuses. If a fan fuse blows, a serious electrical fault has occurred; the fuse should not be replaced until the electrical fault has been corrected. Use tweezers or needle-nose pliers to lift the fuses straight out of their sockets.
CAUTION: Fuses on the Front Fan module and Rear Fan Adapter boards should not be removed or replaced in a live (powered) Platinum IP3 frame.
Table 128: Fan Fuses
Location
Front
Rear
PSF1
PSF2
FC1
PSF1
PSF2
PSF3
Fuse Type Part Number
4 A, Slowblow
4 A, Slowblow
127-100006Q00
127-100006Q00
750 mA, Slowblow 127-100004Q00
5 A, Slowblow
5 A, Slowblow
127-100010Q00
127-100010Q00
750 mA, Slowblow 127-100004Q00
Fuses on Front Fan Modules
Front Fan fuses are visible inside the Front Fan module array. To inspect or remove fuses, first remove the array. Then remove the fuses by lifting them straight out of their sockets.
Figure 140: Front Fan Fuses (Top Module Shown)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 273
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Fuses on Rear Fan Adapter Boards
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
Fuses are located under the base of the black shutter assembly found behind each rear fan.
To gain access to the rear fan fuses, carefully grasp the two tabs on the sides of the shutter assembly.
Then slide the shutter assembly towards you, tilting out the bottom, so that the assembly pivots around the small studs at the top of the opening. When replacing the shutter assembly, ensure the top of the assembly is inserted behind these studs.
CAUTION: Ensure you disconnect the two power cables when replacing rear fan fuses in a live (powered)
IP3 frame.
Figure 141: Rear Shutter Assembly
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 274
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
Figure 142: Rear Fan Fuses
Power Consumption
Table 129: FANS Power Consumption
PX-FRONT-FAN (15 RU)
PX-FRONT-FAN-TOP (28 RU)
PX-FRONT-FAN-BOT
(28 RU)
PX-REAR-FAN-
ADPTR
24V Power Rail 55.2W
5V Power Rail 0.82W
Total per Module 56.02W
55.2W
0.82W
56.02W
0
0.15W
0.15W
PX-REAR-FAN
(15/28 RU)
67W
0
67W
(Note: Includes
172 mm fan)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 275
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Module LEDs
Module LEDs
Card Edge LED Diagnostics
There are multiple card edge LEDs on IP3 Input Modules (PX-IB) (on page 101) and Output Modules (PX-
OB) (see "Input Modules (PX-IB)" on page 101) Modules.
LED Labels
LEDs are labeled as follows:
Input Modules
Output Modules
INPUT 1 to INPUT 9
OUTPUT 1 to OUTPUT 16
Under normal working conditions, all the LEDs are used to indicate signal presence status.
Under certain abnormal conditions, for instance if a module is improperly installed, or the wrong kind of module is plugged in a slot (designed to host another type of module), card edge LEDs are used to show diagnostic information.
LED States
There are three possible states indicated by each LED:
Table 130: LED States
State Description
Off
On
No signal present
Signal present and reclocker locked to signal
Flashing Signal present but reclocker could not lock to signal
Input Module LEDs (on page 277 )
Input 1 and Input 2 (on page 277 )
Input 3, Input 4, Input 5 (on page 277)
Input 6, Input 7, Input 8, Input 9 (on page 277)
Output Module LEDs (on page 278 )
Output 1 - Output 6 (on page 278 )
Output 7, Output 8, Output 9 (on page 278)
Output 13, Output 14, Output 15, Output 16 (on page 279)
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 276
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Input Module LEDs
Module LEDs
Input 1 and Input 2
INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 flash to indicate abnormal hardware status in the slot. Note that they are NOT turning on/off at the same time.
Input 3, Input 4, Input 5
These LED inputs indicate module configuration.
Table 131: LED Inputs 3, 4, 5
INPUT
3
OFF ON
ON
INPUT
4
ON
INPUT
5
Description
OFF
Front Module is SD (270Mbps) only.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system
OFF
Front Module is SD/HD/3G.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system
OFF OFF ON
Front Module is SD (270Mbps) only.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the IP3 system
ON OFF ON
Front Module is SD/HD/3G.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system
Input 6, Input 7, Input 8, Input 9
These LED inputs indicate Back Module types.
Table 132: LED Inputs 6, 7, 8, 9
INPUT
6
ON
OFF
ON
INPUT 7
ON
OFF
OFF
INPUT
8
INPUT
9
Description
ON ON
No Back Module installed at the back of this slot, OR
Front Module not correctly mated with Back Module
OFF OFF
Back Module contains 9x HD-BNC connectors
OFF OFF
Back Module contains 1x DensiShield socket and 1x HD-BNC connector
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 277
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
INPUT
6
OFF
ON
INPUT 7
ON
ON
INPUT
8
INPUT
9
Description
OFF OFF
Back Module contains 5x SFP sockets
OFF OFF
Back Module contains 8x BNC connectors
Module LEDs
Output Module LEDs
Output 1 - Output 6
LEDs OUTPUT 1 to OUTPUT 6 flash to indicate abnormal hardware status in the slot. Note that they are
NOT turning on/off at the same time.
Output 7, Output 8, Output 9
LED Outputs 7, 8, 9
OUTPUT
7
OFF
OUTPUT
8
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OUTPUT
9
OFF
OFF
Description
Front Module is SD (270Mbps) only.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system
Front Module is SD/HD/3G.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system
ON
Front Module is SD (270Mbps) only.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the IP3 system
ON OFF ON
Front Module is SD/HD/3G.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the IP3 system
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 278
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Output 13, Output 14, Output 15, Output 16
These LED outputs indicate Back Module types.
Module LEDs
Table 133: LED Outputs 13, 15, 15, 16
OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT 16 BM Types
ON ON ON ON
No Back Module installed at the back of this slot, OR
Front Module not correctly mated with Back
Module
OFF OFF OFF ON
Back Module contains 16x HD-BNC connectors
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Back Module contains 8x SFP sockets
Back Module contains 2x DensiShield sockets and 8x HD-BNC connectors
Back Module contains 2x DensiShield sockets and 4x SFP sockets
Back Module contains 8x BNC connectors
Back Module contains 2x DensiShield sockets
Back Module contains 4x SFP sockets
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 279
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15)
Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28/PX-
BP-15)
The PX-BP-28 Module Interconnect (MI) is the central interconnect module for the 28 RU Platinum IP3 frame and the 15 RU Platinum IP3 frame uses a PX-BP-15.
The Input, Output, Crosspoint, Resource, Alarm and other modules are interconnected by copper traces in the Backplane. Also, DC power, +24V and +5VL, are distributed within the Backplane to all module's connector.
While the Module Interconnect (MI) is a passive module with no active components on the Module
Interconnect, there are fuses next to each module's connector. These fuses are to prevent damage to
module connectors and the Backplane. See Fuses on the Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28) (on page 281)
for more details.
PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15 Module Slots
Table 134: Module Slots on the PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15
Slot Type PX-BP-28 Slots PX-BP-15 Slots
Input Module Slots 64 32
Output Module Slots
Video Crosspoint Module Slots
64
2
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module Slots 2
Resource (Control) Module Slots 2
32
2
2
2
Sync Distribution Module Slots
Output Monitoring Module Slot
Alarm Expansion Module Slot
Auxiliary Module Slot
Power Distribution Slots
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 280
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15)
Fuses on the Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28)
Figure 143: Fuses on the PX-BP-28 MI Backplane
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 281
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15)
Figure 144: Fuses at the top of PX-BP-28
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 282
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15)
Figure 145: Fuses on left arm of PX-BP-28
Figure 146: Fuses on right arm of PX-BP-28
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 283
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15)
Figure 147: Fuses at the center of the PX-BP-28
Fuses on the PX-BP-28
Fuse Type
Slowblow
Slowblow
Fuse Rating
5 Amps
2 Amps
Fastblow 10 Amps
Present on
Resource Card Slots
Part Number
127-100010Q00
Alarm Card Slots
Output Monitoring Slots
127-100001Q00
All Other Slots 127-100013Q00
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 284
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15)
Fuses on the Module Interconnect (PX-BP-15)
Figure 148: Fuses on the PX-BP-15 MI Backplane
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 285
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15)
Figure 149: Fuses at the top of the PX-BP-15
Figure 150: Fuses in the middle of the PX-BP-15
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 286
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15)
Figure 151: Fuses at the bottom of the PX-BP-15
Module Interconnect Installation
The PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15 Module Interconnect is installed into the IP3 frame at the Imagine
Communications manufacturing facility. This module cannot be replaced in the field.
Fuses can be replaced in the field, however the Frame and External Power Supply frame must be powered down.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 287
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Auxiliary Module (PX-AUX)
Auxiliary Module (PX-AUX)
The Auxiliary Module (PX-AUX) provides connectivity between MI/Backplane (PX-BP-28/PX-BP-15) and the Front Fan modules. The PX-AUX module is plugged into a card slot, in the very center of the frame.
The PX-AUX module contains fuses and Transient Voltage Suppressor (TVS) diodes for over-current and
Transient Voltage protection respectively. Besides these components the PX-AUX is passive.
The module connects power and communication signals from the IP3 MI/backplane to the Front Fan
Modules. It connects 24VDC, 5VDC power and a one-wire interface signal to the two Front Fan Modules.
In case of a 15 RU, the module uses the top fan card connections only.
Figure 152: PX-AUX Module
The PX-AUX has 3 connectors:
One to the MI backplane
One to the Bottom Fan (28 RU only)
One to the Top Fan
WARNING
The PX-AUX module is hot pluggable, however, it is recommended that the frame is powered down first.
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 288
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-AUX Fuses
Auxiliary Module (PX-AUX)
Figure 153: Fuses on the PX-AUX Module
Table 135: PX-AUX Fuse Ratings
Fuse Name Fuse Type
F3, F1 Slowblow
Resettable
Fuse Rating
4 Amps
0.2 Amps
Part Number
127-100006Q00
127-100005Q00
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 289
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-AUX Block Diagram
MI CONECTOR
+24V_Z1
+24V_Z2
+5V_TOP
AUX1
ENET1+/-
ENET2+/-
+24V_Z3
+24V_Z4
+5V_BOTTOM
AUX2
ENET3+/-
ENET4+/-
Figure 154: PX-AUX block diagram
Auxiliary Module (PX-AUX)
TOP FAN CARD
CONNECTOR
+24VA_T
+24VB_T
+5V_T
AUX1
ENET1+/-
ENET2+/-
BOTTOM FAN CARD
CONNECTOR
+24VA_B
+24VB_B
+5V_B
AUX2
ENET3+/-
ENET4+/-
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 290
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Sync Module Interconnect (PX-SYNC-MI)
Sync Module Interconnect (PX-SYNC-MI)
The PX-AUX is a passive module with four connectors. The module provides a passive connection between the MI/Backplane (PX-BP-28), PT-SYNC cards, and Communications Backplane (PX-CBP).
The PX-SYNC-MI Sync Module:
Connects the 4 Sync/Reference input signals on the PX-CBP to both PT-SYNC slots
Connects the Sync/Reference signals from the PT-SYNC modules to the MI/Backplane (PX-BP-28)
Connects +24V and +5VL from the MI/Backplane to both PT-SYNC slots
Also, serial communication from the Resource module (PX-RES) is connected through the MI/Backplane, through the PX-SYNC-MI to the PT-SYNC slots.
Provision has also been made to support:
Genlock over Ethernet, by routing a Sync signal (RES_SYNC) from the Resource module to the PT-SYNC slots
Audio synchronization of two IP3 frame
Figure 155: PX-SYNC-MI Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 291
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-ADPTR)
Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-
ADPTR)
The Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-ADPTR) connects DC power (+24V and +5VL) and control signals
(I2C and Alarm) from the External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) to the Power Distribution modules
(PX-PD-TOP and PX-PD-BOTTOM). Two Power Adapter boards are assembled into the AC/DC Rear Panel.
There are four AC/DC Rear Panels assembled to the IP3 frame; two at the top and two at the bottom.
The Power Adapter module contains fuses and Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVS) diodes for overcurrent and Transient Voltage protection respectively. Besides these components the Power Adapter module is passive.
Eight Power Adapter modules are installed in the frame, so that two PX-FR-EXPS frames can be connected to the IP3 frame for power redundancy.
When the IP3 frame is shipped, plastic covers are placed over the Combo D-sub miniature (Dsub) connector to protect the pins from damage. The plastic covers should only be removed if the PX-FR-EXPS is connected to the IP3 frame.
WARNING
24V and 5V are exposed on D-sub connectors. Keep plastic covers on when not used for connection to
PX-FR-EXPS, to avoid accidental shorting that could disturb the IP3 system.
Figure 156: PX-PWR-ADPTR Module
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 292
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-ADPTR)
WARNING
This module is not hot-pluggable. The Frame must be powered down if you need to remove this module.
Fuses on the Power Adapter PX-PWR-ADPTR
Table 136: PX-PWR-ADPTR - Fuse Ratings
Fuse Name Fuse Type
F1, F2
F3
Fastblow
Fastblow
Fuse Rating
40 Amps
12 Amps
Part Number
127-100014Q00
127-100015Q00
© 2016 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. June 2016 | Page 293
डाउनलोड
सार्वजनिक लिंक अपडेट किया गया
आपकी चैट का सार्वजनिक लिंक अपडेट कर दिया गया है. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
दस्तावेज़ सार्वजनिक लिंक
विज्ञापन
संबंधित
